You are on page 1of 247

Release Date: Jan. 2010 / Manual Revision: 5.

00

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N


USER’S MANUAL

ENTEC ENTEC
ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD

Copyright © 2002 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved. Forerunner Distribution & Automation
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Release Note:

[Oct. 2006] Ver4.00


1. Add explanations for new additional function below
- Support ETHERNET Port(Port4) for EVRC2A
- Support IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Communication (add the setup menu)

[Sept. 2007] Ver4.10


2. Add explanations for new additional function below
- Dialing Modem Support(add the setup menu)

[Sept. 2009] Ver4.12


1. Add explanations for new additional function below
- Support IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Communication (add the setup menu)
- Support Overfrequency Protection Element (add the setup menu)

[Jan. 2010] Ver5.0

After the Ver5.0, the manual is applied to the “EVRC2A-N(Network type)”.


1. Support “ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software)” function(add the setup menu).
This function is used to interface with ETIMS over Ethernet port.
2. Separate “Communication” setting into “Protocol” and “Port” settings.
3. Describe elements consisting of “Protection” section in order of the menu shown in LCD.
4. Add “CLOSE Function at Normal Frequency restored” in Frequency element.
5. Add the description related with “STATUS” menu omitted in the previous version.
6. Add the description related with “MAINTENANCE” menu omitted in the previous version.
7. Add “Fault Trip” in “EVENT RECORDER” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY i
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Summary of Features........................................................................................................... 2

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 5


2.1. Inputs and Outputs............................................................................................................... 5
2.2. Type Withstand Tests........................................................................................................... 7
2.3. Metering Accuracy .............................................................................................................. 8
2.4. Protection Elements............................................................................................................. 9
2.5. Monitoring......................................................................................................................... 12
2.6. Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 13
2.7. Communications................................................................................................................ 16

3. USER INTERFACE PANEL........................................................................................ 17


3.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 18
3.2. LCD Display...................................................................................................................... 26
3.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 29

4. SELECT SETBANK ..................................................................................................... 32


5. RELAY SETUP ............................................................................................................. 33
5.1. Passcode ............................................................................................................................ 33
5.2. Communication ................................................................................................................. 34
5.3. Clock ................................................................................................................................. 52
5.4. Time Display Type ............................................................................................................ 53
5.5. Event Recorder .................................................................................................................. 53
5.6. Clear Saved Data ............................................................................................................... 54
5.7. Factory Debug ................................................................................................................... 54
5.8. Gas Sensor Type ................................................................................................................ 55

6. SYSTEM SETUP........................................................................................................... 56
6.1. Current Sensing ................................................................................................................. 56
6.2. Line VS Sensing................................................................................................................ 58
6.3. Line VL Sensing................................................................................................................ 60

ii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.4. System Power.................................................................................................................... 61


6.5. Panel Sleep Time............................................................................................................... 61
6.6. Opto Input Set - Option..................................................................................................... 62
6.7. Output Relay Set - Option................................................................................................. 63
6.8. Loop Control - Option....................................................................................................... 65
6.9. Loop Control Application.................................................................................................. 77

7. PROTECTION .............................................................................................................. 84
7.1. Reclose (79)....................................................................................................................... 86
7.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P).................................................................... 92
7.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G).................................................................. 96
7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)............................................................................................. 100
7.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46).......................................................... 102
7.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1) .................................................................................... 105
7.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1) ................................................................................. 107
7.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1)........................................................... 109
7.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2)...............................................................................111
7.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2) ........................................................................ 113
7.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2)............................................................ 115
7.12. Cold Load Pickup.......................................................................................................... 117
7.13. Directional Controls (67) .............................................................................................. 122
7.14. Undervoltage (27) ......................................................................................................... 129
7.15. Overvoltage (59) ........................................................................................................... 131
7.16. Frequency(81) ............................................................................................................... 133
7.17. Other Element ............................................................................................................... 136
7.18. Time Overcurrent Curves .............................................................................................. 139

8. MONITORING............................................................................................................ 166
8.1. Demand ........................................................................................................................... 166
8.2. Synchronism Check (25)................................................................................................. 169
8.3. Trip Counter .................................................................................................................... 171
8.4. Recloser Wear.................................................................................................................. 173
8.5. Battery Test...................................................................................................................... 175
8.6. Fault Locator ................................................................................................................... 176

9. STATUS ........................................................................................................................ 178


9.1. OPTO Inputs ................................................................................................................... 178
9.2. Relay Outputs.................................................................................................................. 178

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iii


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.3. Clock ............................................................................................................................... 179


9.4. Control Type.................................................................................................................... 179

10. METERING............................................................................................................... 180


10.1. Metering Elements ........................................................................................................ 180
10.2. Accuracy........................................................................................................................ 187

11. MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................... 188


11.1. Counters......................................................................................................................... 188
11.2. Wear Monitor................................................................................................................. 188
11.3. Output Relay Test .......................................................................................................... 189

12. EVENT RECORDER ............................................................................................... 190


12.1. Waveform Capture......................................................................................................... 190
12.2. System Event Recorder ................................................................................................. 193
12.3. Load Profile................................................................................................................... 195
12.4. Diagnostic Event Recorder............................................................................................ 198
12.5. Fault Trip Event Recorder - Optoin............................................................................... 200

13. INSTALLATION....................................................................................................... 202


13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch ......................................................................... 202
13.2. Vent and Outer Cover .................................................................................................... 203
13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .................................................................................... 204
13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................... 206
13.5. Inner Structure ............................................................................................................... 207
13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions .................................................................................... 208
13.7. User-Available DC Power ............................................................................................. 209
13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses ............................................................................................. 210
13.9. EVRC2A-N Wiring Diagram - CVD Type.................................................................... 211
13.10. EVRC2A-N Wiring Diagram - VT Type..................................................................... 212
13.11. Side Panel .................................................................................................................... 213
13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram................................................................................... 214
13.13. CVD Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................. 215
13.14. VT Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................... 216
13.15. Load Side VT Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 217
13.16. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation................................................................. 218
13.17. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 219
13.18. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling................................................................ 221

iv ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.19. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ...................................................................... 221


13.20. AC Power Cable .......................................................................................................... 222
13.21. Fuses............................................................................................................................ 222
13.22. Battery and Control run time....................................................................................... 223
13.23. Charge Circuit ............................................................................................................. 224
13.24. Battery Change............................................................................................................ 224
13.25. Communications.......................................................................................................... 225
13.26. Communication Cables ............................................................................................... 226
13.27. Hardware Block Diagram............................................................................................ 227
13.28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits................................................................................. 228
13.29. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close ......................................................... 229
13.30. Main Board.................................................................................................................. 230
13.31. Analog Board............................................................................................................... 231
13.32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram................................................................................... 232
13.33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram.................................................................................... 233
13.34. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ............................................................................ 234
13.35. Recloser Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD) ................................................................ 234
13.36. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ............................................................... 235
13.37. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact ............................................................................. 237
13.38. Recloser Trip and Close Coil ...................................................................................... 237
13.39. Recloser Test Kit ......................................................................................................... 238

14. MAINTANANCE....................................................................................................... 239


14.1. Warning Events ............................................................................................................. 239
14.2. Malfunction Events ....................................................................................................... 241

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY v
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1. Description
Ÿ EVRC2A-N with the microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide
protective coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for the continuous best
quality of electric service.

Ÿ Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit - Option)
which fundamentally installed.

Ÿ EVRC2A-N provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and
remote. It also displays the present trip/alarm conditions, and measured system parameters.

Ÿ Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy
metering is also performed.

Ÿ Users can operate Close and Trip, and also control EVRC2A-N with key buttons on the user
interface panel; Protection Enabled, Ground Enabled, SEF Enabled, Reclose Enabled,
Control Locked, Remote enabled, Alternate-settings, Program 1, Program 2, Hot line tag.

Ÿ Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of
settings, acquisition of event data, and management of operation history.

Ÿ EVRC2A-N contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37.112, IEC255-3,
McGraw Edison, and KEPCO to provide fully protective coordination for the continuous
best quality of electric distribution. Users can select any time of current curve simply by
programming and modifying.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 1
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

1.2. Summary of Features


PROTECTION
Ÿ Phase Instantaneous Over-current Element
Ÿ Phase Time Over-current Elements
Ÿ Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Ÿ Ground Instantaneous Over-current Element
Ÿ Ground Time Over-current Elements
Ÿ Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Ÿ Sensitive Earth Fault Elements
Ÿ Negative Instantaneous Over-current Element
Ÿ Negative Time Over-current Elements
Ÿ Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Ÿ Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Earth and Negative Sequence Directional Control
Ÿ Automatic Reclosing(Up To 4 Shots)
Ÿ Cold Load Pickup with Voltage Control
Ÿ Sequence Coordination Control
Ÿ Two Under-voltage Elements
Ÿ Two Over-voltage Elements
Ÿ Under-frequency Element
Ÿ Over-frequency Element
Ÿ Loop Control

MONITORING
Ÿ Fault Locator
Ÿ Demand trip and alarm(Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, I2)
Ÿ Trip Counter Limit
Ÿ Synchronism Check
Ÿ Recloser main contact Wear(Per Phase)
Ÿ Recloser Operation Failure
Ÿ Voltage Transformer Failure
Ÿ Battery Automatic Load Test
Ÿ Breaker Failure with Current Supervision
Ÿ Recloser Gas Over and Low pressure
※. NOTE ) According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure
monitoring.

2 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

METERING
Ÿ Phase, Ground and Sensitive Ground Current and Phasors
Ÿ Line and Phase Voltage and Phasors
Ÿ Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component Phasors
Ÿ Frequency Magnitude and Rate
Ÿ Synchronizing Voltage, Phasor and Frequency
Ÿ Synchronizing Delta㎸, Delta ㎐ and Delta Leg
Ÿ Single and Three Phase Power(MW, Mvar, MVA, PF)
Ÿ Energy(MWh, Mvarh)
Ÿ Maximum Demand(Ia, Ib, Ic, MW, Mvar, MVA)

COMMUNICATIONS
Ÿ Front Panel PORT1 RS232 Serial Port : EVRC2A-N interface software
Ÿ Side panel PORT2 RS232 Serial Port : DNP 3.0 or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol - Option
Ÿ Side panel PORT3 RS485/422 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol –
Option
Ÿ Side panel PORT4 RJ45 Port : DNP 3.0 or IEC60870-5-104 Protocol and EVRC2A-N
interface software – Option

RECORDER
Ÿ Trip and fault counter
Ÿ System event recorder - last 500 events
Ÿ Diagnostic event recorder - last 100 events
Ÿ Load profile recorder - last 42days
Ÿ Fault Waveform - 15 cycles×16

USER INTERFACE
Ÿ Fault indicators
Ÿ Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage
Ÿ Dual Functional keypads
Ÿ 20×4 Character Display(LCD or VFD : Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
Ÿ 32 LED indicators - Fault indications, sequence status, battery status, etc
Ÿ RS232 port
Ÿ Context Help Messages
Ÿ Access Security(Passcode)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 3
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

AUXILIARY OUTPUTS - Option


Ÿ 7 Programmable Relays
Ÿ 1 Programmable Alarm Relay

AUXILIARY INPUTS - Option


Ÿ 8 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs

4 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1. Inputs and Outputs
Systems
Ÿ 3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38㎸ maximum, 800 Amp maximum

Frequency
Ÿ 50 / 60㎐ system and ABC/ACB phase rotation

Control Voltage Input


Ÿ AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (+10%,-15%)
Ÿ Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc

User available DC power Output - Option


Ÿ DC Power Voltage : 12, 15, 24Vdc
Ÿ DC Power Continuous : 30W
Ÿ DC Power for 10Sec : 70W

Capacitor Voltage Divider Inputs (CVD) - Standard


Ÿ Maximum Input Voltage 5V
Ÿ Burden : 2e-6 VA
Ÿ System Voltage : 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸
Ÿ Capacitor value
n EVR
- Phase Capacitor value : 20㎊
n EPR
- Source Side Phase Capacitor value : 26㎊
- Load Side Phase Capacitor value : 20㎊(Option)

Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Option


Ÿ Voltage Inputs VA, VB, VC and VL
Ÿ Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V
Ÿ Burden: 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 5
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Current Transformer Inputs (CT)


Ÿ Current Inputs IA,IB,IC and IG, SEF
Ÿ IA,IB,IC,IG Input Current Range
n 1A Nominal
n 2A continuous
n 25A 1 second
n Burden : 0.38VA(1A)
Ÿ SEF Input Current Range
n 0.05A Nominal
n 0.16A Continuous
n 0.6A 1 second
n Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)

Control Inputs - Option


Ÿ Control Inputs 8 Channel
Ÿ Nominal Voltages and Operating Range
n 250Vdc(-15%,+20%)
n 125Vdc(-15%,+20%)
n 48Vdc(-15%,+20%)
n 24Vdc(-15%,+20%)
n 12Vdc(-10%,+30%)
Ÿ Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages

Control Output Contacts - Option


Ÿ Control Outputs 8 Channel
n Normal Open 5 Channel
n Normal Close 2 Channel
n ALARM 1 Channel
Ÿ 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection
Ÿ Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20℃(+68℉)
Ÿ Maximum operating power
125Vdc 0.1A
(L/R=7ms) 48Vdc 0.8A
24Vdc 3A
250Vac 3A
(cosΦ=0.4)
125Vac 5A

6 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.2. Type Withstand Tests


Dielectric Strength
Ÿ CT inputs, VT inputs, Control Power inputs, Opto-isolated inputs and Relay outputs
n 2㎸(60㎐) for 1 minute

Impulse Voltage
Ÿ IEEE C62.45 (1992) Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic
Interference Transceivers, 6㎸(1.2×50㎲), 3㎄(8×20㎲)

Surge Withstand Capability


Ÿ IEEE C37.90.1 - 1989 IEEE SWC Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems
(3㎸ oscillatory 1㎒ to 1.5㎒, 5㎸ fast transient 1.2×50㎲)
Ÿ IEEE C37.90.2 - 1987 IEEE Trial-Use Standard, Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers, 10 V/m
(150㎒ and 450㎒, 5 W transmitter 10㎝)

Vibration Test
Ÿ IEC 255-21-1 - 1988 Electrical relays, Part 21 : Vibration, shock, bump, and seismic tests on
measuring relays and protection equipment, Section One - Vibration tests (sinusoidal), Class
2.

Control Operating Temperature


Ÿ Operating range : -25℃∼+70℃(-13℉∼+158℉)
Ÿ LCD : -20℃∼+70℃(-4℉∼+158℉) - standard
Ÿ VFD : -40℃∼+85℃(-40℉∼+185℉) - option(Vacuum Fluorescent Display)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 7
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.3. Metering Accuracy


The harmonic components of current and voltage are removed from the input voltage and current
parameters, so all measurements based on these quantities respond to the fundamental
components only.

Table 2-1. Metering Accuracy


Accuracy
Measurements Parameters Unit Range
CVD VT

Phase A RMS Current

Phase B RMS Current


CURRENT A ±1% of 2 x CT ±1% of 2 x CT 20 x CT
Phase C RMS Current
Phase G RMS Current

A–N (A–B) RMS Voltage

VOLTAGE B–N (B–C) RMS Voltage ㎸ ±2.5% ±1% -


C–N (C–A) RMS Voltage

SYMMETRICAL I1, I2, 3I0 A ±1% of 2 x CT ±1% of 2 x CT


-
COMPONENTS V1, V2, 3V0 ㎸ ±2.5% ±1%

POWER Phase A, B, C
Rate ±0.05 ±0.02 -1.00 to 1.00
FACTOR 3Φ Phase

Phase A, B, C
3ΦREAL POWER MW ±3% ±2% –320.00 to 320.00
3Φ Phase

3ΦREACTIVE Phase A, B, C
Mvar ±3% ±2% –320.00 to 320.00
POWER 3Φ Phase

3ΦAPPARENT Phase A, B, C
MVA ±3% ±2% –320.00 to 320.00
POWER 3Φ Phase

Phase A, B, C
WATT-HOURS MW/h ±5% ±3% –32000 to 32000
3Φ Phase

Phase A/B/C/G Current A ±2% ±2%

A/B/C, 3Φ Real Power MW ±5% ±3%


DEMAND -
A/B/C, 3Φ Reactive Power Mvar ±5% ±3%

A/B/C, 3Φ Apparent Power MVA ±5% ±3%

A-N (A-B) Source


FREQUENCY ㎐ ±0.05 ±0.02 40.00 to 65.00
Load Voltage

• If the VT connection type is set to delta, all single phase voltage quantities are displayed as
zero.

8 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.4. Protection Elements


Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection
Phase/Negative Pickup Level.................................... 0.04 to 3.20 in steps of 0.01 x CT
Ground Pickup Level ................................................ 0.02 to 3.20 in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup
Curve Type
n ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse, Definite Time (1s ,10s)
n IEC : Standard, Very, Extremely, Long, Short Inverse
n ESB : Normally, Very, Long Very Inverse
n User programmable curves : U1, U2, U3, U4
n McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37
Time dial ................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
Time adder................................................................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01
Minimum Response time .......................................... 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Type ................................................................. Instantaneous/Linear
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection


Pickup Level.............................................................. 1.00 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay................................................................ 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Active Trip ................................................................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max)
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection


Pickup Level.............................................................. 1.00 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay................................................................ 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Active Trip ................................................................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max)
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 9
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Sensitive Earth Definite Time Overcurrent Protection


Pickup Level..............................................................OFF, 0.005 to 0.1600 in steps of 0.001 xCT
Dropout Level ...........................................................95 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay ................................................................0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Pickup Level Accuracy..............................................5%
Timing Accuracy .......................................................at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max)
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Phase Directional Control


Polarizing Voltage .....................................................Positive Sequence Voltage V1
Maximum Torque Angle............................................0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy .........................................................± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ...........................................1.5cycle

Ground/Sensitive Earth Directional Control


Polarizing Voltage .....................................................Zero Sequence Voltage Vo
For voltage element polarizing the source
VTs must be connected in Wye
Maximum Torque Angle............................................0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy .........................................................± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ...........................................1.5cycle

Negative Directional Control


Polarizing Voltage .....................................................Negative Sequence Voltage V2
Maximum Torque Angle............................................0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy .........................................................± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ...........................................1.5cycle

Reclose Control
Operations to Lockout - phase trip ............................1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - ground trip..........................1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - SEF trip ..............................1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - Negative Seq’ trip...............1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - phase trip.........................0 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - ground trip ......................0 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - Negative Seq’ trip ...........0 to 5 in steps of 1

10 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Reclose interval 1...................................................... 0.50 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01


Reclose interval 2...................................................... 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reclose interval 3...................................................... 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reclose interval 4...................................................... 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset time for Auto Reclose Cycle ........................... 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset time from lockout ............................................ 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5%

Cold Load Pickup Blocking


Phase Pickup Level ................................................... 1.00 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT
Ground Pickup Level ................................................ 1.00 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT
SEF Pickup Level...................................................... 1.00 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT
Negative Seq’ Pickup Level ...................................... 1.00 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT
Reset Level................................................................ 95 to 98% of Nominal Pickup
Outage Time .............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Restore Minimum Time ............................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Reset Time................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max)
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Undervoltage 1/2 Protection


Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Minimum Voltage...................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Active Phases ............................................................ Any One/Any Two/All Three
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20㎳

Overvoltage 1/2 Protection


Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Active Phases ............................................................ Any One/Any Two/All Three
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 11
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Under/Over frequency
Minimum Voltage......................................................0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT in Phase A
Minimum Current......................................................0.00 to 3.20 in steps of 0.01 x CT in Phase A
Under frequency Pickup Level..................................40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐
Over frequency Pickup Level....................................50.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐
Dropout Level ...........................................................at VT Pickup + 0.02㎐
at CVD Pickup+0.05㎐
Under/Over frequency Time Delay ...........................0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s (definite
time)
Normal frequency CLOSE function..........................OFF/ON
Normal frequency CLOSE time delay ......................0.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1sec
Level Accuracy..........................................................at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Timing Accuracy .......................................................2cycle

2.5. Monitoring
Demand
Measured Values........................................................Phase A/B/C/G Current(A)
Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Real Power(MW)
Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Reactive Power(Mvar)
Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Apparent Power(MVA)
Measurement Type ....................................................Thermal Exponential/Rolling Demand
Time Constant ...........................................................5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 min.
Phase Pickup Level ...................................................0.04 to 3.20 in steps of 0.01 x CT
Ground Pickup Level.................................................0.02 to 3.20 in steps of 0.01 x CT
Negative Seq’ Pickup Level ......................................0.04 to 3.20 in steps of 0.01 x CT
Level Accuracy..........................................................± 5%

Synchronism Check
Dead Voltage Maximum............................................0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Live Voltage Maximum.............................................0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Maximum Voltage Difference ...................................0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Maximum Angle Difference......................................0 to 100° in steps of 1°
Maximum Frequency Difference ..............................0.00 to 5.00㎐ in steps of 0.01
Synchro-check Phase.................................................R(AB), S(CB), T of Load side

12 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Trip Counters
Number of Pickup Limit ........................................... 1 to 20000 in steps of 1
Trip Counter Set ........................................................ 0 to 10000 in steps of 1

Recloser Wear
Pickup Wear .............................................................. 0 to 100% in steps of 0.1
Rate System............................................................... 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸
Rate Interrupt(㎸)...................................................... 5.0 to 50.0㎸ in steps of 0.1
Number of Maximum Interruption............................ 1 to 999 in steps of 1
Set Phase A Wear....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Set Phase B Wear ...................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Set Phase C Wear ...................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1

Battery Test
Period for automatically check a battery................... OFF, 1 to 7days in steps of 1day

Fault Locator
Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9km of 0.1km
Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Real impedance of the feeder zero seq...................... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq............. 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms

2.6. Recorder
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
Ÿ Trigger Source
n Protection pickup Elements
n Trip command active
Ÿ Data Channels
n 4 currents, 3 voltages, Frequency, 32 logic input states, 8ch output relays, 8ch Input
Ÿ Sample Rate : 16 per cycle
Ÿ Trigger Position : 1 to 15cycle
Ÿ Storage capacity : 16 events with 15cycle

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 13
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER


Ÿ Trigger Source
n Protection Elements
n 52A Contact
n Sequence status
n Front panel control
n AC supply
n External control
n Fail operation
n External input status
n System alarm
Ÿ Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle
Ÿ Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
Ÿ Storage Capacity : Last 500 Events

DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER


Ÿ Trigger Source
n System Power(AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V)
n A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2)
n Sleep Mode
n Power Down Mode
n Setting Change
n Gas Status
※. NOTE ) According to a recloser type, there may be no diagnosis of gas
pressure status.
Ÿ Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle
Ÿ Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
Ÿ Storage Capacity : Last 100 Events

LOAD PROFILE
Ÿ Trigger Source
n Demand Current(A, B, C, G)
n Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
n Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
n Trigger Time : 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60minute
Ÿ Storage Capacity : Total 1024 Events, 42days/60min.

14 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

FAULT TRIP EVENT RECORDER


Ÿ Trigger Source
n Taget elements : A,B,C,G phase
n Current[A] per each phase when fault occurs
Ÿ Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle
Ÿ Trigger type : fault occurrance
Ÿ Storage Capacity : Last 50 Events

COUNTER
Ÿ Trip : 0 to 65534
Ÿ Fault : 0 to 65534
Ÿ System Restart : 0 to 65534

RECLOSER WEAR
Ÿ Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
Ÿ Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
Ÿ Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 15
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.7. Communications
Table 2-2. Communications
RS232, 19200bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop bit
Front Panel Port1
EVRC2A-N interface software
RS232, 1200-19200bps, No Parity, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit
Side panel Port2 - Option
DNP 3.0 or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
RS485/422, 1200-19200bps, None, Odd orEven Parity, 7 or 8
Side panel Port3 – Option Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
Modbus Protocol, DNP 3.0 or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
RJ-45, 10BASE-T/100BASE-T
Side panel Port4 – Option DNP 3.0 or IEC60870-5-104 Protocol,
and EVRC2A-N interface software

16 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3. USER INTERFACE PANEL


This section describes the User Interface Panel(front-panel)
The User interface Panel control is used for;
Ÿ Directly control the recloser
Ÿ Verify control status
Ÿ View system status
Ÿ View metering value
Ÿ View information stored in the EVRC2A-N unit
Ÿ View and change the EVRC2A-N settings

Figure 3-1. User Interface Panel

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 17
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3.1. Construction
Panel consists of 8 sections as below;
Ÿ Operation section
Ÿ Local control section
Ÿ Fault indication section
Ÿ Voltage elements section
Ÿ Sequence status section
Ÿ System diagnostic section
Ÿ Battery test section
Ÿ Menu control section

3.1.1. Operation Section

OPEN
Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Recloser.

CLOSE
Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Recloser.
Units operating with firmware version 2.18 or later have a feature of Close Time Delay. The Close
Time Delay allows a delay of 0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before
closing the recloser

POSITION LED
Indicates the position of the Recloser. Position indicator is based on the Recloser 52a contacts.

Figure 3-2. Operation Section

18 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3.1.2. Local Control Section

All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the
control function is enable and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is
DISABLE. The push-button toggles Enable/Disable

PROTECTION ENABLED
All Protection elements are enabled
GROUND ENABLED
Ground Protection elements are disabled
SEF ENABLED
SEF Protection elements are disabled
RECLOSE ENABLED
Reclose function is enabled
CONTROL LOCKED
Front panel function is unlocked
REMOTE ENABLED
Remote control is disabled
ALTERNATE SETTINGS
Alternate setting is disable Figure 3-3. Local Control Section
Primary Setting is enable
PROGRAM 1
Program 1 function is disabled
PROGRAM 2
Program 2 function is disabled
HOT LINE TAG
Hot Line Tag function is disabled

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 19
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Protection Enabled
When illuminated, all protection elements are enabled. The protection enabled condition can be
disabled by pressing the Protection Enabled push button on the front panel. The front panel LED
will illuminate on either source of all protection enabling.
NOTE : Although all protection elements are enabled, ground protection elements and SEF
element are operated individually.

Ground Enabled
When Ground Enable LED is ON, the ground over-current elements are enabled. The enabled
Ground can be disabled by pressing the Ground Enabled push-button on the front panel.

SEF Enabled
When SEF Enable LED is on, the Sensitive Earth Fault(SEF) element is enabled. The enabled
SEF can be disabled by pressing the SEF Enabled push-button on the front panel.

Reclose Enabled
When Reclose Enable LED is on, the reclose(79) element is enabled. The enabled reclose
element can be disabled by pressing the Rcloser Enabled push-button on the front panel.

Control Locked
When Control Locked LED is on, all functions in operation section and all functions in Local
control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the Control Locked push-button
on the front panel
NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, OPEN, Lamp Test, Battery Load
Test and menu control section can be normally operated.

Remote Enabled
When Remote Enabled LED is on, all remote control function (e.g. SCADA system) are enabled.
This can be disabled by pressing the Remote Enabled push-button on the front panel. SCADA
control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0

Alternate Enabled
When Alternate Enabled LED is on, the Alternate setting is activated.
When Alternate Enabled LED is off, the primary setting is activated.

20 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Program 1
A function installed in Program1 is operated when Program1 LED is On.
Depending on user’s request, Manufacturer sets a function in Program1.

Program 2
A function installed in Program2 is operated when Program1 LED is On.
Depending on user’s request, Manufacturer sets a function in Program2.

Hot Line Tag


When Hot Line Tag LED is on, the Hot Line Tag function is enabled.

3.1.3. Fault Indication Section

Indicates current on the phase or neutral lines is above the minimum pickup setting as programmed
in any of the EVRC2A-N over-current elements

Ÿ Phase Instantaneous over-current Elements


Ÿ Phase Time over-current Elements
Ÿ Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Ÿ Ground Instantaneous over-current Elements
Ÿ Ground Time over-current Elements
Ÿ Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Ÿ Sensitive Ground Time Over-current Elements
Ÿ Negative Instantaneous over-current Elements
Ÿ Negative Time over-current Elements
Ÿ Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
Ÿ Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground, and Negative Sequence Directional Control

Figure 3-4. Fault Indication Section

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 21
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

TRIP TYPE
Ÿ INST : Shows high current trip (50-1)
Ÿ DELAY : Shows delay trip(51)
Ÿ HIGH CURR’ : Shows high current lockout(50-2)

FAULT INDICATION
Ÿ A, B, C : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on one of the phase lines
Ÿ G : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on the neutral line
Ÿ SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on the neutral line
Ÿ FI RESET : Reset fault indication/Lamp test

3.1.4. Voltage Elements Section

Indicates that voltage pickup element is operated.


Ÿ Two Under voltage Elements
Ÿ Two Over voltage Elements
Ÿ Synchronism Element
Ÿ Under frequency Element

27 : Under voltage pickup


59 : Over voltage pickup
25 : Synchronism check pickup
81 : Under/Over frequency pickup

Figure 3-5. Voltage Elements Section

22 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3.1.5. Sequence Status Section

Indicates the current status of programmed sequence procedure.

RESET : Sequence shows resetting


CYCLE : Sequence shows running
LOCKOUT : Sequence shows lockout

Figure 3-6. Sequence Status Section

3.1.6. System Diagnostic Section

Indicates Diagnostic status of the EVRC2A-N. Control run indicates (green) the EVRC2A-N has
successfully passed its internal diagnostic test. Self Check (Red) indicates the EVRC2A-N has
failed its internal diagnostic test.

CONTROL RUN
Status of EVRC2A-N systems shows normal

SELF CHECK
Status of EVRC2A-N systems shows warning

Figure 3-7. System Diagnostic Section

NOTE : Control Run LED is blinking when system functional status is normal

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 23
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3.1.7. Battery Test Section

Indicates the system power status of the EVRC2A-N. AC supply indicates the EVRC2A-N has
external power source. Charge indicates the EVRC2A-N is charging Battery. Discharge indicates
the EVRC2A-N has failed battery load testing.

AC SUPPLY
Status of supplying the external AC power.
CHARGE
Status of charging the battery.
DISCHARGE Figure 3-8. Battery Test Section
Status of discharged battery.
BATTERY LOAD TEST
Push-button for battery load test.
[BATTERY TEST MODE]
LOAD(V) : 25.00
LCD displays during Battery Load Testing. CHARGE(V): 26.50
STATUS : CHARGE

Figure 3-9. Battery Test Mode


3.1.8. Menu Control Section

The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of the EVRC2A-N displays four lines of twenty characters
each.

LCD DISPLAY
4x20 Characters display

CONTROL KEYS
[▲] [▼] [◀] [▶]
Arrow keys are used for the moving between the menu window and the changing of the setting
value
[▲] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▼] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode
[◀] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▶] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode
[FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode
[ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level
[ENT] : To select sub menu or data input

24 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 3-10. Menu Control Section

[FUN] Key
Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key
is also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message
display.

[ESC] Key
The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu.

[ENT] Key
ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to
accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key.

[◀] [▶] Key


Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor when you are in the data input mode and when
you change display message.

[▲] [▼] Key


Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase
value when you are in the data input mode.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 25
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3.2. LCD Display


Ÿ 20 x 4 Character Display(LCD or VFD : Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
Ÿ All menus are arranged in rotation algorism.
Ÿ When cursor is in top menu, if you press [▲] key, you go to the bottom menu due to Rotation
Menu Algorism.
Ÿ Displays Context Help Message.

3.2.1. Main Menu Summary


EVRC2A-N has 6 Setting Menu BANKs which can be changed individually.
BANK in Primary Setting Menu is applied to System, BANK in Alternate Setting/EditBank
Setting Menu is not applied to System. Press [Alternate Enabled] button, when the lamp is on,
Alternate setting Menu is applied to the system. EditBank Setting is used for setting value.

EVRC2A-N Main Menu consists of 8 sub-menus.

Figure 3-11. Main Menu Tree

3.2.2. Select Setbank


Consists of Primary, Alternate, Edit.
Ÿ Primary : Select BANK to be applied to System.
Ÿ Alternate : Press [Alternate Enable] button and select a BANK to apply in the system.
Ÿ Edit : Select a BANK to edit.

26 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3.2.3. Primary Setting


RELAY SETUP
Consists of PASSCODE, COMMUNICATION, CLOCK, TIME DISP’TYPE, EVENT
RECORDER, CLEAR SAVED DATA, FACTORY DEBUG., GAS SENSOR TYPE
SYSTEM SETUP
Consists of CURRENT SENSING, LINE (VS, VL), SYSTEM POWER, PANEL SLEEP TIME,
OPTO INPUT SET, OUTPUT RELAY.
PROTECTION
Set items related to protection elements.
MONITORING
Set items related to measurement and maintenance.
SAVE SETTINGS
Save all changed values.

3.2.4. Alternate Setting


The same as “PRIMARY SETTING”

3.2.5. Editbank Setting


The same as “PRIMARY SETTING”

3.2.6. Status
OPTO INPUT : Shows status of External port.
RELAY OUTPUT : Shows status of Output port.
CLOCK : Shows the present time.
CONTROL TYPE : Shows specs of Hardware.

3.2.7. Metering
Shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see 10. METERING)

3.2.8. Maintenance
COUNTER : Shows counters related with SYSTEM.
WEAR MONITOR : Shows any damage Interrupter.
RELAY OUTPUT TEST : Test External Output port.
For more details, refer to (see 11. MAINTENANCE)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 27
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3.2.9. Event Recorder


Shows about Event recorder items. For more details, refer to (see 12. EVENT RECORDER).

[LINE CURRENT(A)]
A: 0 B: 0
C: 0 G: 0
SG: 0 I2: 0

[ZERO SEQ CURRENT]


0 A 0.0 Lag

[RELAY SETUP] [COMMUNICATION]


>1.PASSCODE >1.REMOTE METHOD
2.COMMUNICATION 2.COMM SETTING
[SETTING]
3.CLOCK 3.DIALLING MODEM
PRIMARY >1.RELAY SETUP
4.TIME DIS TYPE 4.PORT SETTING
[POS SEQ CURRENT] 2.SYSTEM SETUP
ALTERNATE 5.EVENT RECORDER
0 A 0.0 Lag 3.PROTECTION
EDITBANK 4.MONITORRING 6.CLEAR SAVED DATA [CLEAR SAVED DATA]
[NEG SEQ CURRENT]
0 A 0.0 Lag 5.SAVE SETTING 7.FACTORY DEBUG >1.Fault Cycle
8.GAS SENSOR TYPE 2.System Status
3.Load Profile
4.Daignostic
[SYSTEM SETUP]
5.Max Demand
[SENSTV CURRENT] >1.CURRENT SENSING
6.Energy
0 A 0.0 Lag 2.LINE VS SENSING
7.Counter
3.LINE VL SENSING
8.Wear Monitor
4.SYSTEM POWER
9.Fault Trip
5.PANEL SLEEP TIME
6.OPTO INPUT SET 10.All Saved Data
7.OUTPUT RELAY SET
8.LOOP CONTROL
[PHASE C CURRENT]
0 A 0.0 Lag [DIRECTION ELEMENT]
[STATUS] [PROTECTION]
[GROUND CURRENT] >1.PHASE DIRECTION
>1.OPTO INPUTS >1.OPERATION
0 A 0.0 Lag 2.GROUND DIRECTION
2.RELAY OUTPUTS 2.INTERVALS
3.SEF DIRECTION
3.CLOCK 3.PICKUP CURRENT
4.NEQ DIRECTION
4.CONTROL TYPE 4.PHASE FAST
5.PHASE DELAY
[PHASE A CURRENT] 6.GROUND FAST [VOLTAGE]
0 A 0.0 Lag 7.GROUND DELAY >1.UNDER VOLTAGE 1
[PHASE B CURRENT] 8.SEF ELEMENT 2.UNDER VOLTAGE 2
0 A 0.0 Lag 9.NEG SEQ FAST 3.OVER VOLTAGE 1
10.NEG SEQ DELAY 4.OVER VOLTAGE 2
11.H/C TRIP-PHA
12.H/C TRIP-GND [USER CURVE SET]
[METERING] 13.H/C TRIP-NEQ >1.USER CURVE 1
ESC
>1.CURRENT 14.H/C LOCKOUT-PHA 2.USER CURVE 2
2.VOLTAGE 15.H/C LOCKOUT-GND 3.USER CURVE 3
3.FREQUENCY 16.H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ 4.USER CURVE 4
ENT 4.SYNCHRO VOLTAGE 17.CLOD LOAD PICKUP
RECLOSER CONTROL 5.POWER 18.DIRECTION
6.ENERGY 19.VOLTAGE
EVERC2A
7.DEMAND 20.FREQUENCY
LOOP CONTROL
ENTEC E&E CO. V5.03 8.SYSTEM 21.OTHER ELEMENT
22.USER CURVE SET

[MONITORING]
EVRC2A - CURRENT (A) >1.DEMAND
A: 0 B: 0 2.SYNCHROCHECK
C: 0 G: 0 3.TRIP COUNTER
SG: 0 I2: 0 4.RECLOSER WEAR
5.BATTERY TEST
[MAINTENANCE] 6.FAULT LOCATOR
>1.COUNTERS
EVR2A-SYSTEM STATUS 2.WEAR MONITOR
CONTROL : NOPANEL 3.OUTPUT RELAY TEST
BREAKER : OPEN
BAT:24.00

FUN ESC

[MAIN MENU]
>1.SELECT SETBANK
[EVENT RECORDER]
2.PRIMARY SETTING
>1.FAULT CYCLE
3.ALTERNAT SETTING
4.EDITBANK SETTING 2.SYSTEM STATUS
5.STATUS 3.LOAD PROFILE
4.DIAGNOSTIC
6.METERING
7.MAINTENANCE 5.FAULT TRIP
8.EVENT RECORDER

Figure 3-12. Menu Structure Tree

28 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3.3. Using the LCD Menu


Starting mode Screen appears after powering on Control and initializing System.
INITING LOGO
RECLOSER CONTROL Starting mode Message Display.
EVRC2A
LOOP CONTROL System Name : RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A LOOP CONTROL
ENTEC E&E CO. V5.03
Manufacturer : ENTEC Electric & Electronic Co., Ltd
Control Firmware Version : 5.03
On Starting mode screen, to see Main Menu, press [FUN] key. Use [▲] [▼] key to select sub-
menu. When cursor is in top menu, if you press [▲] key, you go to the bottom menu due to
Rotation Menu Algorism.

MAIN MENU
[MAIN MENU] Main Menu consists of 8 sub-menu.
>1.SELECT SETBANK
2.PRIMARY SETTING You can choose any sub-menu by using [▲] [▼] key.
3.ALTERNATE SETTING
4.EDITBANK SETTING Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.
5.STATUS
6.METERING
7.MAINTENANCE
8.EVENT RECORDER

As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.

3.3.1. View Example


To see External input port status. Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OPTO INPUT”.
The following screen is displayed.
STATUS / OPTO INPUTS
[OPTO INPUTS]
Input 1: OPEN OPEN : Shows External Input is de-asserted,
Input 2: CLOSE
Input 3: OPEN CLOSE : Shows External Input is asserted.
Input 4: OPEN
Input 5: OPEN
Input 6: OPEN
Input 7: OPEN Only 4 lines are displayed on LCD Screen, use [▲] [▼] key to see next
Input 8: CLOSE
lines.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 29
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3.3.2. Setting Example


Step to change Phase Pickup current of protection elements in Primary setting.

1) Move to “PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE”.


A following screen is displayed.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE
[PICKUP CURRENT xCT] Range OFF, 0.04 ~ 3.20
>Phase: 0.50
Ground: 0.25 Default 0.50 Step 0.01
S.E.F: OFF
Setting value x CT Phase Ratio
Ex) When CT ratio is 1000:1and setting value is 0.50,
Pickup Current : 0.50 x 1000 = 500A

2) As above screen, to move to Phase, use [▲] [▼] key and press [ENT] key to move into
value column.

3) Use [▲] [▼] keys and [◀] [▶] keys to change a new value.
Press [ENT] key, then you see the changed Phase value.
NOTE : You must save all changed values at Setting Save menu.

3.3.3. Help Function


Help function displays the detail requirements for the setting.
User can check the detail requirements of a setting after selecting the setting item by pressing
[FUN] key.
Help Message
Pick up current - ph Help Message :
>Phase: 0.50
Ground: 0.25 Pickup current - phase (OFF,0.01-3.20 x CT phase ratio)
S.E.F: OFF

30 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3.3.4. Setting Save


To save all changed values, steps are as follows;
Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / SAVE SETTING” and follow
each step as below.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / SAVE SETTING

1) Type Passcode and press [ENT] key
ENTER PASSCODE
0000

2) If Passcode is correct, screen ②(Left) appears; otherwise screen ①


② (Left) appears again.
SETTING VALUE SAVE

<ENT>:SETTING SAVE 3) If screen ② appears, press [ENT] key to save changed value.

③ NOTE :
The changed setting can be effective after it is saved.
SETTING CHANGE
If the “save” procedure is canceled, the setting keeps previous
value.
However, by EVRC2A-N version 5.30, if a setting related with
communication is changed and then saved, the changed setting is
applied after rebooting.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 31
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

4. SELECT SETBANK
There were only Primary and Alternative banks below version 4.40. Higher than 4.40 version has
included 4 more banks.

EVRC2A-N has 6 setting banks and the user can have 6 different sets depending on Distribution
circumstance.

SELECT SETBNAK / PRIMARY


[SELECT SETBANK] Range BANK1 ~ 6
>Primary: BANK1
Alternate: BANK2 Default BANK1 Step ~
Edit: BANK3

Set Primary for BANK1.

SELECT SETBNAK / ALTERNATE


[SELECT SETBANK] Range BANK1 ~ 6
>Primary: BANK1
>Alternate: BANK2 Default BANK2 Default ~
Edit: BANK3

Set Alternate for BANK2.

SELECT SETBNAK / EDIT


[SELECT SETBANK] Range BANK1 ~ 6
>Primary: BANK1
>Alternate: BANK2 Default BANK3 Default ~
>Edit: BANK3

Set Edit for BANK3.

32 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5. RELAY SETUP
Relay set shall be set independently for each bank. However, after version 4.41, regardless of
bank, it will be applied to all other banks if it is set in a bank.

Sets following items for Relay


Ÿ Passcode
Ÿ Communication
Ÿ Clock
Ÿ Time Dis’Type
Ÿ Event Recorder
Ÿ Clear Saved Data
Ÿ Factory Debug
Ÿ Gas Sensor Type
※. NOTE ) According to a recloser type, there may be no “Gas Sensor Type”
menu.

5.1. Passcode
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / PASSCODE
① Ÿ Press PASSCODE to store changed value.
[PASSCODE CHANGE] Ÿ PASSCODE has 4 digits.
ENTER PASSCODE
0000 Ÿ Passcode change procedure is as follows;

② ① Enter the old PASSCODE, and press [ENT] key.


[PASSCODE CHANGE]
ENTER NEW PASSCODE
0000 ② Enter new PASSCODE, and press [ENT] key.

③ ③ To change and store PASSCODE, enter, [ENT] key.


[PASSCODE CHANGE]
ENTER NEW PASSCODE
0000
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
④ After changing PASSCODE, new PASSCODE will be displayed.


[PASSCODE CHANGE]
ENTER NEW PASSCODE
0000
PASSCODE SAVED: 0000

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 33
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.2. Communication
5.2.1. Overview
EVRC2A-N has four ports for communication.

The EVRC2A-N has the front panel RS232 port, the side panel RS232 port, the side panel
RS485/422 port and the side panel Ethernet port.
Communication port settings are available as follows in “Table 5-1. Communication Ports
setting of EVRC2A-N”.

Table 5-1. Communication Ports setting of EVRC2A-N


Port Type Speed Parity bit Data bit Stop bit Location

PORT1 RS-232 19200 bps No parity 8 1 User Interface Front Panel

PORT2 RS-232 1200 - 19200 bps No parity 8 1 User Interface Side Panel

PORT3 RS-422/485 1200 - 19200 bps None, Odd, Even 7, 8 1, 2 User Interface Side Panel

PORT4 RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-T User Interface Side Panel

PORT1
A port to interface with Interface Software.

PORT2– Option
A port to remotely operate with DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol, user can change Interface
Speed, DNP3.0 and IEC60870-5-101 setting.
A complete description of DNP services is in “DNP3.0 Protocol Technical Manual”.

PORT 3 – Option
A port to remotely operate with MODBUS, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol, user can
change Interface Speed, Parity bit, Data bit, Stop bit, MODBUS, DNP3.0 and IEC60870-5-101
setting.
A complete description of MODBUS services is in “MODBUS Protocol Technical Manual”.

PORT 4 – Option
A port to remotely operate with IEC60870-5-104 or DNP3.0 Protocol. A complete description of
IEC60870-5-101/-104 services is in “IEC60870-5-101/-104 Protocol Technical Manual”.
During communication with IEC60870-5-104 or DNP3.0, a user can connect with and use
Interface Software “ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software)” via the port4. The

34 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Port4 consists of RJ-45 interface. 10 BASE-T /100 BASE-T speed.

NOTE: By EVRC2A-N version 5.30, if a setting related with communication is changed and
then saved, the changed setting is applied after rebooting.

5.2.2. Remote Method


PRIMARY SETTING/RELAY SETUP/COMMUNICATION / REMOTE METHOD / Select
[REMOTE METHOD] Range DNP3.0, MODBUS, IEC101, IEC104
>Select: DNP3.0
Default DNP3.0 Step ~

Select remote protocol.

5.2.3. RTU Communication Setup (DNP 3.0 Protocol) - Option


EVRC2A-N can be programmed for communication using the DNP 3.0 through communication
port2, port3 or port4. For details, refer to “DNP3.0 Protocol Technical Manual”

Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP /


COMMUNICATION / COMM STTING / DNP3.0” to select setting for DNP Protocol.
COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / D/L Confirm
[DNP3.0] Range NO, YES, SOME
>D/L confirm: SOME
>D/L Retries: 2 Default SOME Step ~
D/L Timeout: 55
Select the data link confirmation mode desired for response sent by the
EVRC2A-N.
NO : Never confirm request
YES : Always confirm request
SOME : Data link confirmation is only requested when the response
contains more than one frame

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / D/L Retries


[DNP3.0] Range 0, 1, 2
D/L confirm: SOME
>D/L Retries: 2 Default 2 Step 1
D/L Timeout: 55
Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link
layer.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 35
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / D/L Timeout


[DNP3.0] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
D/L confirm: SOME
D/L Retries: 2 Default 55 Step 1 sec
>D/L Timeout: 55
Enter a desired timeout. If no confirmation response is received within
this time and if retries are still available, the EVRC2A-N will resend
the frame.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / A/L Retries


[DNP3.0] Range 0, 1, 2
D/L Retries: 2
D/L Timeout: 55 Default 1 Step 1
>A/L Retries: 1
Select the number of retries that will be issued for a given application
link layer.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / A/L Timeout


[DNP3.0] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
D/L Timeout: 55
A/L Retries: 1 Default 55 Step 1 sec
>A/L Timeout: 55

Enter an Application layer timeout.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / PowUp Unsol


[DNP3.0] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
A/L Retries: 1
A/L Timeout: 55 Default ENABLE Step 1
>PowUpUnsol: ENABLE
Select the unsolicited mode
Enable : Unsolicited response is transmitted.
Disable : Unsolicited response is not transmitted.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / Unsol time


[DNP3.0] Range 0 ~ 255 sec
A/L Timeout: 55
PowUpUnsol: ENABLE Default 5 Step 1 sec
>Unsol time: 5

Enter the minimum time from when unsolicited event occurred.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / Master Addr


[DNP3.0] Range 0 ~ 65535
PowUpUnsol: ENABLE
Unsol time: 5 Default 65534 Step 1
>Master Addr: 65534

Enter the master station address.

36 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / SBO Time


[DNP3.0] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
Unsol time: 5
Master Addr: 65534 Default 15 Step 1 sec
>SBO Time: 15

Enter the duration of the select/operate arm timer.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / DNP Address


[DNP3.0] Range 0 ~ 65535
Master Addr: 65534
SBO Time: 15 Default 1 Step 1
>DNP Address: 1

Enter the slave(EVRC2A-N) address.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / Multi Inter


[DNP3.0] Range 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
>SBO Time: 15
>DNP Address: 1 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 sec
>Multi Inter: 0.10

Enter a time delay between frames when Multi-frame replies.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / Tx Delay


[DNP3.0] Range 0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
>DNP Address: 1
Multi Inter: 0.10 Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
>Tx Delay : 0.05

Delay time of sending Real data after RTS Signal is on.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / Class 1


[DNP3.0] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Class 1: DISABLE
Class 2: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>Class 3: DISABLE

Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 1 events.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / Class 2


[DNP3.0] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
Class 1: DISABLE
>Class 2: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>Class 3: DISABLE

Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 2 events.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 37
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / Class 3


[DNP3.0] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
Class 1: DISABLE
Class 2: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>Class 3: DISABLE

Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 3 events.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / Time Req(m)


[DNP3.0] Range 0(OFF), 1~30000 min
Class 2: DISABLE
Class 3: DISABLE Default OFF Step 1 min
>Time Req(m): OFF

Enter the Time Synch’ Request Interval.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / DNP3.0 / Use Port


[DNP3.0] Range P2-232, P3-485, P4-TCP
>Class 3: DISABLE
>Time Req(m): OFF Default P2-232 Step ~
>Use Port: P2-232

Select the Use Port of Control.

5.2.4. RTU Communication Setup (MODBUS Protocol) - Option


EVRC2A-N can be programmed for communication using the MODBUS through
communication port3. For details, refer to “MODBUS Protocol Technical Manual”

Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP /


COMMUNICATION / COMM STTING / MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS Protocol.
COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / MODBUS / Modbus Type
Range RTU, ASII
[MODBUS]
>Modbus Type: RTU Default RTU Step ~
>Slave Address: 1
>Tx Delay: 0.05
Select the Modbus protocol type.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / MODBUS / Slave Address


Range 1 ~ 254
[MODBUS]
>Modbus Type: RTU Default 1 Step 1
>Slave Address: 1
>Tx Delay: 0.05
Enter the Modbus address.

38 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / MODBUS / Tx Delay


Range 0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
[MODBUS]
>Modbus Type: RTU Default 0.05 sec Step 0.01
>Slave Address: 1
>Tx Delay: 0.05
Delay time of sending Real data after RTS Signal is on.

5.2.5. RTU Communication Setup (IEC60870-5-101/104) - Option


EVRC2A-N can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-104 through
communication port4 and the IEC60860-5-101 through communication port 2 or port 3. For
details, refer to “IEC60870-5-101/-104 Protocol Technical Manual”

Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP /


COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / IEC60870-5-101/104” to select setting for
IEC60870-5-101/104.
COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / IEC60870-5-101/104 / ASDU Addr
[IEC60870-5-101/104] Range 0~65535
>ASDU Addr: 0
>Cyclic Period: 60 Default 0 Step 1
>Time Out(t0): 120
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / IEC60870-5-101/104 / Cyclic Period


[IEC60870-5-101/104] Range 1~60000 sec
>ASDU Addr: 0
>Cyclic Period: 60 Default 60 Step 1 sec
>Time Out(t0): 120
Select the Cyclic Period.
It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / IEC60870-5-101/104 / Time Out(t0)


[IEC60870-5-101/104] Range 1~255 sec
>ASDU Addr: 0
>Cyclic Period: 60 Default 120 Step 1
>Time Out(t0): 120

Select the Timeout for connection establishment.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 39
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / IEC60870-5-101/104 / Time Out(t1)


[IEC60870-5-101/104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t1): 15
>Time Out(t2): 10 Default 15 Step 1
>Time Out(t3): 20

Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / IEC60870-5-101/104 / Time Out(t2)


[IEC60870-5-101/104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t1): 15
>Time Out(t2): 10 Default 10 Step 1
>Time Out(t3): 20
Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message
( t2<t1).

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / IEC60870-5-101/104 / Time Out(t3)


[IEC60870-5-101/104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t1): 15
>Time Out(t2): 10 Default 20 Step 1
>Time Out(t3): 20

Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / IEC60870-5-101/104 / Event Period


[IEC60870-5-101/104] Range 0~255 sec
>Time Out(t3): 20
>Event Period: 5 Default 5 Step 1
>Use Port-101:P2-232
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / IEC60870-5-101/104 / Use Port-101


[IEC60870-5-101/104] Range P2-232, P3-485
>Time Out(t3): 20
>Event Period: 5 Default P2-232 Step ~
>Use Port-101:P2-232
Select the IEC101 Use Port of Control

40 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.2.6. RTU Communication Setup (ETIMS DNP3.0) - Option

EVRC2A-N can be interfaced with ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software) by using


port4 as “ETIMS DNP3.0” is selected.

In order to configure “ETIMS DSP3.0,” go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK


SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / ETIMS DNP3.0”.
COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / ETIMS DNP3.0 / Function
[ETIMS(DNP3.0)] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
>D/L Timeout: 5 Default DISABLE Step ~
>A/L Timeout: 15
Enable or disable the use of ETIMS DNP3.0.

NOTE :
In case that setting is remotely changed by using ETIMS, Setting
value of all Setbank including Primary and Alternate should be
“Enable”. Otherwise, communication may be disconnected when
setting group is changed.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / ETIMS DNP3.0 / D/L Timeout


Range 1 ~ 255 sec
[ETIMS(DNP3.0)]
>Function: DISABLE Default 5 Step 1 sec
>D/L Timeout: 5
>A/L Timeout: 15
Enter a desired timeout. If no confirmation response is received within
this time and if retries are still available, the EVRC2A-N will resend
the frame.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / ETIMS DNP3.0 / A/L Timeout


[ETIMS(DNP3.0)] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>Function: DISABLE
>D/L Timeout: 5 Default 15 Step 1 sec
>A/L Timeout: 15
Enter an Application layer timeout.

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / ETIMS DNP3.0 / Master Addr


[ETIMS(DNP3.0)] Range 0 ~ 65535
>A/L Timeout: 15
>Master Addr: 65534 Default 65534 Step 1
>DNP Address: 1000
Enter the master station address.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 41
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMMUNICATION / COMM SETTING / ETIMS DNP3.0 / DNP Address


[ETIMS(DNP3.0)] Range 0 ~ 65535
>A/L Timeout: 15
>Master Addr: 65534 Default 1000 Step 1
>DNP Address: 1000
Enter the slave (EVRC2A-N) address.

5.2.7. RTU Communication Setup (DIALING MODEM) - Option


EVRC2A-N can support a Hayes compatible Modem on Port 2 for remote dial up access.

5.2.7.1. Configure modem with AT commands

Before using of Modem connected with EVRC2A-N, following setting shall be confirmed.

Configure port speed(must be done)


Set DNP communication speed the same as the speed between EVRC2A-N and Modem, and set
DNP communication speed slower than the speed between modems.

Configure answer mode(frequently)


The modem will answer an incoming call on the second ring using the command ATS0=2.

Configure Data Carrier Detect(must be done)


Data Carrier Detect should follow the presence or absence of a calling modem.
The AT command is AT&C1.

Configure Data Terminal Ready(must be done)


Data Terminal Ready should control the modem. If DTR is high the modem is ready to receive
calls. If DTR is low the modem should not receive any more calls and should hang up any
existing call.
The AT command is AT&D2.

Configure Data Set Ready(must be done)


Data Set Ready should verify the modem. DSR is always ON.
The AT command is AT&S0.

42 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Configure no CONNECT messages(must be done)


A Hayes AT-style modem usually outputs a message when a call is received. For example:

CONNECT 9600
The modem has a "quiet mode" that disables these messages.
The AT command is ATQ1. There will be no OK printed in response to this command.

Configure no echo of commands(must be done)


Echoing commands can confuse the console, so turn off command echoing.
The AT command is ATE0.

Configure silent connection(must be done)


Most modems have a speaker. By default this is connected whilst a modem is connecting and
negotiating a common protocol and speed. This is very useful for a dialing modem, as it prevents
a human being accidentally repeatedly called. The speaker can be annoying on answering
modems.
The AT command is ATM1.

5.2.7.2. Operation functions when to use Dialling Modem

Transmitting a Communication Packet


Ÿ Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
Ÿ The Communication packet is transmitted
※ Dial when DCD is Deassert

Receiving a Communication Packet


Ÿ Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
Ÿ The Communication packet is received
※ if DCD is Deassert, receiving is not working.

Dialling
Ÿ The user should insert an order for Reset.
Ÿ Wait 0.5 second
Ÿ Make a phone call by using Dialling String and Dialling Number.
Ÿ Checks DCD is Asserted
※ Dial connection waiting time is depending on “ Data Link Timeout” set by the user.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 43
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Hang up
Ÿ DTR Line is deasserted
Ÿ Wait 2 second
Ÿ DTR Line is asserted
Ÿ Wait 2 second
※ EVRC2A-N will hang up the modem after a delay of 30 seconds with no valid packet received
or transmitted.

5.2.7.3. Settup

Calling String
In order to set “Calling String”, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING /
RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALLING MODEM / CALLING STRING”.
COMMUNICATION / DIALLING MODEM / CALLING STRING
① Select a proper dial string in accordance with communication
[CALLING STRING] circumstance(Master or Switchboard dial method).
ATDT ATD : Default Dial
ATDT : Tone Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type)
② ATDP : Pulse Dial
[NEW CALLING STRING]
ATDT
At ①, Insert “Calling String” which a user wants.
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE

③ 1) In order to change each alphabet(A~Z, space), use [▲],


[NEW CALLING STRING] [▼] button, use [◀], [▶] button to move cursor.
ATDT
2) Push the [ENT] button after “Calling String” is changed,
!!! SAVE OK !!!
then ② is shown.

[NEW CALLING STRING] If [ENT] button is pushed at ②, then “Calling String” is
ATDT
changed. Change of setting is completed and then ③ is shown.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!

If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②, ④ is shown, but changed setting


is not applied yet.
NOTE: The changed setting is effective after it is saved at
“*.SAVE SETTING” menu.

44 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Calling Number

In order to set “Calling Number”, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING /


RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALLING MODEM / CALLING NUMBER” menu.
COMMUNICATION / DIALLING MODEM / CALLING NUMBER
① Insert [Modem(Master station) phone number] for calling.
[CALLING NUMBER] Total 16 numbers can be inputted. If numbers under 16 are inputted, the
0000000000000000 rest should be inputted with “X”.

② Insert “Calling Number” which a user wants at ①.


[NEW CALLING NUMBER]
0000000000000000
1) Use [▲], [▼] button to change each number(0~9, X) and use [◀],
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
[▶] button to move a cursor.
③ 2) Press [ENT] button after changing and then ② is shown.
[NEW CALLING NUMBER]
0000000000000XXX
“Calling Number” is changed if [ENT] button is pushed. Changing
!!! SAVE OK !!!
setting is completed and then ③ is shown.

[NEW CALLING NUMBER] If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②, ④ is shown, but changed setting
0000000000000XXX
is not applied yet.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!

NOTE : The changed setting is effective after it is saved at


“*.SAVE SETTING” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 45
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Initial String

In order to set “Initial String”, “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY


SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALLING MODEM / INITIAL STRING” menu.
COMMUNICATION / DIALLING MODEM / INITIAL STRING
① Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number,
[INITIAL STRING] character, space or special character.
ATQ1E0M1&C1&D2S0=1
<AT+FCLASS=0 > EVRC2A-N should be reset before making a phone call(connection).
< >
※ Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ingnor next String.

[NEW INITIAL STRING] Insert “Initial String” which a user wants on ①.
AT+FCLASS=0
1) Use [▲], [▼] button to change each number, alphabet, space or
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
special character and use [◀], [▶] button to move a cursor.
③ 2) Press [ENT] button after changing and then ② is shown.
[NEW INITIAL STRING]
AT+FCLASS=0
NOTE : continuous double spaces or the character next to “\” is
!!! SAVE OK !!!
ignored.

[NEW INITIAL STRING] “Initial String” is changed if [ENT] button is pushed. Changing
AT+FCLASS=0
setting is completed and then ③ is shown.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!

If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②, ④ is shown, but changed setting


is not applied yet.

NOTE : The changed setting is effective after it is saved at


“*.SAVE SETTING” menu.

46 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.2.8. RTU Port Setup


5.2.8.1. RS232 Port Setup

Used for DNP3.0 and IEC60870-5-101 protocol communication and to configure Port2 located
on side of panel.

In order to set Port 2, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY


SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS232” menu.
COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS232 / Line Speed
[RS232 PORT] Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
>Line Speed: 19200
Line Type: 4-wire Default 19200 Step ~
D/L confirm: SOME

Select the baud rate for Port 2.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS232 / Line Type


Range 2-wire, 4-wire
[RS232 PORT]
Line Speed: 1200 Default 4 -wire Step ~
>Line Type: 4-wire
>RTS Off Dly: 0.05
Select the type of communication wire.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS232 / RTS Off Dly


Range 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
[RS232 PORT]
>RTS Off Dly: 0.05 Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
>CTS Chk Out: 5.00
>DCD Timeout: 5.00
Enter the turn-off time of RTS signal. In other words, it’s a time delay
to prohibit the last data loss after sending data. Usually Turn-OFF time
is set to 1 or 2 Byte carrier occurrence time

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS232 / CTS Chk Out


Range 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
[RS232 PORT]
>RTS Off Dly: 0.05 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>CTS Chk Out: 5.00
>DCD Timeout: 5.00
Enter a waiting time between outgoing RTS(Request To Send) signal
and incoming CTS(Clear To Send) signal.
In other words, before sending a data, it’s a time interval to wait until
CTS signal becomes High after sending RTS signal High.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 47
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS232 / DCD Timeout


Range 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
[RS232 PORT]
>RTS Off Dly: 0.05 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>CTS Chk Out: 5.00
>DCD Timeout: 5.00 Enter the minimum time from when a DNP request is received and a
response issued.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS232 / RTS Function


Range OFF, ON, AUTO
[PROT1(232)]
>RTS Function: AUTO Default AUTO Step ~
>CTS Function: ON
>DCD Function: OFF
ON : RTS signal of EVRC2A-N is always ON(Assert).
OFF : RTS signal of EVRC2A-N is always OFF(Deassert).
AUTO : When data transfer to modem is requested, RTR signal of
EVRC2A-N is ON and then, if the data transfer is completed, the RTR
signal of EVRC2A-N is OFF.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS232 / CTS Function


Range ON, OFF
[PROT1(232)]
>RTS Function: AUTO Default ON Step ~
>CTS Function: ON
>DCD Function: OFF
Enable or disable the use of CTS signal.
ON : After CTS signal becomes Assert, data is sent.
OFF : data is sent regardless of CTS signal.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS232 / DCD Function


Range ON, OFF
[PROT1(232)]
>RTS Function: AUTO Default OFF Step ~
>CTS Function: ON
>DCD Function: OFF Enable or disable the use of DCD signal.
ON : After DCD signal becomes Deassert, data is sent.
OFF : data is sent regardless of DCD signal.

48 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.2.8.2. RS485/422 Port Setup

Used for MODBUS, DNP3.0 and IEC60870-5-101 protocol communication and configures Port
3 located on the side of EVRC2A-N panel.

In order to configure Port 3, “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY


SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS485/422” menu.
COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS485/422 / Line Speed
[RS485(422) PORT] Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
>Line Speed: 1200
>Line Type: 485LINE Default 1200 Step ~
>Parity Chk: NONE
Select the baud rate for Port 3.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS485/422 / Line Type


[RS485(422) PORT] Range 485LINE, 422 LINE
>Line Speed: 1200
>Line Type: 485LINE Default 485 LINE Step ~
>Parity Chk: NONE
Select the line type.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS485/422 / Parity Chk


[RS485(422) PORT] Range NONE, ODD, EVEN
>Line Speed: 1200
>Line Type: 485LINE Default NONE Step ~
>Parity Chk: NONE
Select the Parity Check.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS485/422 / Data Bit


[RS485(422) PORT] Range 7, 8
>Parity Chk: NONE
>Data Bit: 8 Default 8 Step ~
>Stop Bit: 1
Select the Data Bit.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / RS485/422 / Stop Bit


[RS485(422) PORT] Range 1, 2
>Parity Chk: NONE
>Data Bit: 8 Default 1 Step ~
>Stop Bit: 1

Select the Stop Bit.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 49
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.2.8.3. Ethernet Port Setup

Used for DNP3.0, IEC60870-5-104 protocol communication and interface with ETIMS and
configures Port4 located on the side of EVRC2A-N panel.

In order to configure Port 4, “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY


SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / ETHERNET” menu.
COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / ETHERNET / IP Addr’1~4

[ETHERNET PORT]
Range 0 ~ 255
>IP Addr’1: 0
IP Addr’2: 0
Default 0 Step 1
IP Addr’3: 0
IP Addr’4: 0
Select the IP Address for IEC60870-5-104 Communication.
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④

IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / ETHERNET / Gateway Addr’1~4

[ETHERNET PORT]
Range 0 ~ 255
>Gateway Addr’1: 0
Gateway Addr’2: 0
Default 0 Step 1
Gateway Addr’3: 0
Gateway Addr’4: 0
Select the Gateway Address for IEC60870-5-104 Communication.
Gateway Address : 211.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
Gateway Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / ETHERNET / S/M


[ETHERNET PORT] Range 255.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.252
>S/M:255.255.255.000
>Tcp Port(DNP):20000 Default 255.255.255.000 Step ~
>Tcp Port(104): 2404

Select the Subnet Mask.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / ETHERNET / Tcp Port(DNP)


[ETHERNET PORT] Range 1~65535
>Tcp Port(DNP):20000
>Tcp Port(104): 2404 Default 20000 Step 1
>Tcp Port(IMS):22000

Select the Tcp Port Number for DNP3.0 communication.

50 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / ETHERNET / Tcp Port(104)


[ETHERNET PORT] Range 1~65535
>Tcp Port(DNP):20000
>Tcp Port(104): 2404 Default 2404 Step 1
>Tcp Port(IMS):22000

Select the Tcp Port Number for IEC60870-5-104 communication.

COMMUNICATION / PORT SETTING / ETHERNET / Tcp Port(IMS)


[ETHERNET PORT] Range 1~65535
>Tcp Port(DNP):20000
>Tcp Port(104): 2404 Default 22000 Step 1
>Tcp Port(IMS):22000
Select the Tcp Port Number for ETIMS(interface software)
communication.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 51
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.3. Clock
In order to configure current date and time, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK
SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLOCK” menu.
RELAY SETUP / CLOCK

① Press [ENT] button at ① and then as shown at ②, a cursor


[CURRENT TIME] is marked to be able to change current date and time
2009/11/05 21:02:38

PRESS <ENT> TO SET


1) Use [▲][▼] button to change number and press [▶] button to
② move to next item.
[SETTING TIME] 2) After all settings for time are changed, press [ENT] button to save.
2009/11/05 21:02:38

PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE


Press [ENT] button at ③ to save the changed time settings

[SAVE TIME] If procedure of saving is completed, ④ is shown.
2009/11/06 15;01:50
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
If [ESC] button is pressed at ③, ⑤ is shown and the
④ changed time settings are not saved.

[SAVE TIME]

* SUCCESS *

[SAVE TIME]

* ABORT *

52 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.4. Time Display Type


It is to set Date Display for all related Menu.
Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / TIME
DISP’ TYPE”.
RELAY SETUP / TIME DIS’TYPE
[TIME DISP’TYPE] Range YMD, MDY
>Time Disp’Type: YMD
Default YMD Step ~
YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date
MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year

5.5. Event Recorder


Event Recording elements are set such as Recording and Sampling timing and so on.
Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT
RECORDER” to select setting for the event recording elements.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Fault Cycle
[EVENT RECORDER] Range ON, OFF
>Fault Cycle: ON
>Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~
>Load Profil: ON

Select On or Off for Fault Cycle recording.

RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Len’ of Pre F


[EVENT RECORDER] Range 0 ~ 14 cycle
>Fault Cycle: ON
>Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default 4 Step 1 cycle
>Load Profil: ON

Enter the length of prefault in fault cycle.

RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Load Profile


[EVENT RECORDER] Range ON, OFF
>Fault Cycle: ON
>Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~
>Load Profile: ON

Select On or Off for Load Profile recording.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 53
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / L.P save time(m)


[EVENT RECORDER] Range 5,10, 15,20,30,60 min
>Fault Cycle: ON
>Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default 15 Step ~
>L.P save time(m):15

Set Load Profile recording interval.

5.6. Clear Saved Data


In order to reset saved data, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING /
RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” menu.
RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA
[CLEAR SAVED DATA] Clear Saved Data
>1.Fault Cycle
>2.System Status Select item for clearing and then press [ENT] button.
>3.Load Profile
>4.Daignostic If procedure of clearing is completed, the message, “EVENT CLEAR
>5.Max Demand
>6.Energy SUCCESS” , is shown.
>7.Counter
>8.Wear Monitor
9.Fault Trip
>10.All Saved Data
Ÿ Fault Cycle
Ÿ System Status
FAULT CYCLE DATA Ÿ Load Profile
PRESS ENT TO CLEAR Ÿ Daignostic
Ÿ Max Demand
FAULT CYCLE DATA Ÿ Energy
!! DATA CLEARED !! Ÿ Counter
Ÿ Wear Monitor
Ÿ Fault Trip
Ÿ All Saved Data

NOTE : It is recommanded to have Backup data because


Cleared(Deleted) data can not be recovered.

5.7. Factory Debug


This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.

54 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.8. Gas Sensor Type


Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / GAS
SENSOR TYPE” to select setting for the gas sensor type.

PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / GAS SENSOR TYPE


[GAS SENSOR TYPE] Range NONE, TYPE1, TYPE2
>Type Select: TYPE2
Default TYPE2 Step ~
NONE : Gas Sensor is not used.
TYPE1 : Set TYPE1 if Recloser manufactured before JUNE year
2005.
TYPE2 : Set TYPE2 if Recloser manufactured after JULY year 2005.

※. NOTE ) According to a recloser type, there may be no this setting on the


menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 55
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6. SYSTEM SETUP
System set shall be set independently for each bank. However, after version 4.41, regardless of
bank, it will be applied to all other banks if it is set in a bank.

Sets following items for System


Ÿ CT Ratio
Ÿ VT or PT Ratio
Ÿ Power Line Frequency, Phase rotation
Ÿ Panel sleep time
Ÿ Opto-Input setting
Ÿ Relay output setting
Ÿ Loop Control setting

6.1. Current Sensing


6.1.1. Description
This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection features that have settings specified
in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and sensitive ground CT
inputs must be specified as 1 Amp.
As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase
currents (Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for the neutral over-current. In
addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary
conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration,
the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the
sensitive earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be
entered.

For additional details on CT connections, refer to (see 13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram).

56 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio
[CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 1200
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
SEF CT Ratio: 1000

Enter the phase CT primary current value.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio


[CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 1200
PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
SEF CT Ratio: 1000

Enter the ground CT primary current value.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio


[CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 1200
PHA CT Ratio: 1000
GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
>SEF CT Ratio: 1000

Enter the sensitive earth CT primary current value.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 57
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.2. Line VS Sensing


6.2.1. Description
To measure Source Voltage, set Connect Type, 2nd Nominal Voltage, VT Ratio.
With Line VTs installed, the EVRC2A-N can be used to perform voltage measurements, power
calculations, and directional control of over-current elements.

6.2.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VS SENSING / Connect Type
[LINE VS SENSING] Range NONE, WYE, DELTA, CVD-W, CVD-D
>Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default CVD-W Step ~
VT Ratio: 86.6
Enter None if line VTs are not to be used.
NONE : VT uninstalled.
If used, external PT by user, enter the VT connection made to the
system as Wye or Delta.
WYE : Install type wye.
DELTA : Install type delta.
If installed VT of Capacitor Voltage Divide type.
CVD-W : If the user system made to 3 phase 4 wire.
CVD-D : If the user system made to 3 phase 3 wire.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VT SENSING / VS 2nd(v)


[LINE VS SENSING] Range 50.0 ~ 250.0 V
Connect Type: NONE
>VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default 100.0 Step 0.1 V
VT Ratio: 86.6
Enter Secondary Nominal Voltage(V)
This setting is the voltage across the VT secondary winding when
nominal voltage is applied to the primary.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VT SENSING / VS Ratio


[LINE VS SENSING] Range 10.0 ~ 760.0
Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default 86.6 Step 0.1
>VT Ratio: 86.6

Enter the VT primary to secondary turns-ratio with this setting.

58 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.2.3. Setting Examples

Use of CVD
Case of CVD installed in Recloser, setup as follows;

Usable in Wye connection. Set VT2nd(v) 100 as Default.


PT Ratio is calculated as below.
VoltageФ-Ф = VoltageФ-N × SQRT(3)
VoltageФ-N = VT 2nd(v) × VT Ratio

Hence,
15㎸Ф-Ф = 8.66㎸Ф-N, therefore 8.66㎸Ф-N = 100(V) × 86.6
If user line voltage between phases (VoltageФ-Ф) is 11, set VT2nd(v) of 73.3V and set VT Ratio of
86.6 (11㎸Ф-Ф => 6.35㎸Ф-N, 6.35㎸ = 73.3(V) × 86.6)
27㎸Ф-Ф = 15.59㎸Ф-N, therefore 15.59㎸Ф-N = 100(V) × 155.9
38㎸Ф-Ф = 21.94㎸Ф-N, therefore 21.94㎸Ф-N = 100(V) × 219.4

Use of External PT by User


Line is Wye connection type and has VФ-Ф = 15㎸. If external rated PT is 14400 : 120, then VT
Ratio is 14400/120. Because of 15㎸Ф-Ф = 8.66㎸Ф-N, VT2nd(v) is 8.66㎸Ф-N / 120 = 71.2V

Line with Delta connection type and has VФ-Ф= 15㎸. If external rated PT is 14400 : 120, then
VT Ratio is 14400/120 and VT2nd(v) is 15㎸Ф-Ф / 120 = 125V

Table 6-1. VT Ratios of External PTs


Capacitor Voltage Divider Potential Transformer
Line-Line
Wye connection Wye connection Delta connection
Voltage
VT 2nd (v) VT Ratio VT 2nd (v) VT Ratio VT 2nd (v) VT Ratio

120 120
15㎸ 100 86.6 71.2 125
(14400:120) (14400:120)

215 215
27㎸ 100 155.9 72.5 125.6
(25800:120) (25800:120)

300 300
38㎸ 100 219.4 73.1 126.7
(36000:120) (36000:120)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 59
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.3. Line VL Sensing


6.3.1. Description
To measure Load Voltage, set Connect Type, 2nd Nominal Voltage, VT Ratio.
With Line VTs installed, the EVRC2A-N can be used to perform synchronism elements.

6.3.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / Connect Type
[LINE VL SENSING] Range NONE, WYE, DELTA, CVD-W, CVD-D
>Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default CVD-W Step ~
VT Ratio: 86.6
Enter None if line VTs are not to be used.
NONE : VT uninstalled.
If used, external PT by user, enter the VT connection made to the
system as Wye or Delta.
WYE : Install type wye.
DELTA : Install type delta.
If installed VT of Capacitor Voltage Divide type.
CVD-W : If the user system made to 3 phase 4 wire.
CVD-D : If the user system made to 3 phase 3 wire.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / VT 2nd(v)


[LINE VL SENSING] Range 50.0 ~ 250.0 V
Connect Type: NONE
>VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default 100.0 Step 0.1 V
VT Ratio: 86.6
Enter Secondary Nominal Voltage(V)
This setting is the voltage across the VT secondary winding when
nominal voltage is applied to the primary.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / VT Ratio


[LINE VL SENSING] Range 10.0 ~ 760.0
Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default 86.6 Step 0.1
>VT Ratio: 86.6

Enter the VT primary to secondary turns-ratio with this setting.

6.3.3. Setting Example


Refer to (6.2.3. Setting Examples)

60 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.4. System Power


6.4.1. Description
Menu to set Frequency of Protected Line and installed Phase rotation.

6.4.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Frequency
[SYSTEM POWER] Range 50, 60 ㎐
>Frequency: 50
Phase Rotation: ABC Default 50 Step ~
Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a
default to set the optimal digital sampling rate.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Phase Rotation


[SYSTEM POWER] Range ABC, ACB
Frequency: 50
>Phase Rotation: ABC Default ABC Step ~

Select the phase rotation of the power system.

6.5. Panel Sleep Time


6.5.1. Description
Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.

6.5.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / PANEL SLEEP TIME
[PANEL SLEEP TIME] Range OFF, 1 ~ 100 min
>Interval(m): 5
Default 5 Step 1 min
Enter the sleep mode entering time
Setting the interval time of which Panel indicator turns into Sleep
mode.
On “sleep mode”, press [▼] button to be out from the “sleep mode”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 61
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.6. Opto Input Set - Option


6.6.1. Description
Menu to set External input terminal function and Debounce time.
The opto input is available as an ordering option.

Status LCD Display

Debounce
time Triger
EXTERNAL X
INPUT X Function execute

REMOTE mode

Figure 6-1. Input logic

6.6.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OPTO INPUT SET / I1 Func
[OPTO INPUT SET] Range NONE, TRIP, … , OUT8 RESET
>I1 Func: NONE
I1 Debounce: 0.02 Default NONE Step ~
I2 Func: NONE
Enter the function of External input terminal Opto input can have
following functions.
NONE TRIP CLOSE

PROTECTION GROUND SEF

Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Enable/Disable

RECLOSE CONTROL ALTERNATE SETTINGS

Enable/Disable Locked/Unlocked Enable/Disable

PROGRAM1 PROGRAM2 HOT LINE TAG

Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Enable/Disable

FAULT INDICATION OUTPUT RELAY


BATTERY LOAD TEST
RESET 1∼8 RESET.

For more details, refer to (Appendix A).

62 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OPTO INPUT SET / I1 Debounce


[OPTO INPUT SET] Range 0.01 ~ 9.99 sec
I1 Func: NONE
>I1 Debounce: 0.02 Default 0.02 Step 0.01 sec
I2 Func: NONE
Enter debounce time to prevent chattering in Input

Input 2 ~ Input 8, the same as Input 1 above

6.7. Output Relay Set - Option


6.7.1. Description
Menu to set External Output Terminal Function and Output type.
The output relay is available as an ordering option.

Protective Elements
Relay Setting
( 50.51,27,59...etc )

Function Occurrence
Status LCD Display

S/R LATCH
Pulse T

Type PULSE Y OUTxx Relay

Latch
LATCH S
Q
R

OPTO INPUT SET(OUTxx Reset)


Pulse

OUTPUT RELAY TEST


2s

Figure 6-2. Output logic

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 63
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.7.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Func
[OUTPUT RELAY SET] Range NONE, TRIP, … , INPUT08
>O1 Func: NONE
O1 Type: S/R LATCH Default NONE Step ~
O1 Pulse T: 0.05
Enter the function of External output terminal.
Output Relay can have following function.
NONE TRIP CLOSE

FAIL TRIP FAIL CLOSE FAIL AC

FAIL BATTTERY 27 ELEMENT 59 ELEMENT

25 ELEMENT 81 ELEMENT 79 RESET

79CYCLE 79LOCKOUT SELFCHECK

PROTECTION Enable GROUND Enable SEF Enable

RECLOSE Enable CONTROL Locked REMOTE Enable

ALTERNATE SETTINGS
PROGRAM1 Enable PROGRAM2 Enable
Enable

HOT LINE TAG Enable FAULT INDICATION ALARM

52A INPUT 1~ 8

For more detail, refer to (Appendix B).

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Type


[OUTPUT RELAY SET] Range PULSE, LATCH, S/R LATCH
01 Func: NONE
>O1 Type: S/R LATCH Default S/R LATCH Step ~
O1 Pulse T: 0.05
S/R LATCH: Output signal is delivered only this function activates
(ON).
PULSE: Output signal is delivered only during PULSE T. To activate
Output aganin, turn this function OFF and then, turn it ON again.
LATCH: Output signal is delivered once this function ON. To turn it
off, it needs Reset signal and it is set in “OPTO INPUT SET”

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Pulse T


[OUTPUT RELAY SET] Range 0.01 ~ 99.99 sec
01 Func: NONE
O1 Type: S/R LATCH Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
>O1 Pulse T: 0.05
Sets Duration time if OUTPUT TYPE is PULSE

Output 2 ~ 8, the same as above.

64 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.8. Loop Control - Option


The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal
operation area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs.
Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser, MID
point Recloser, TIE point Recloser.
Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage), LV(Live Line Voltage).

Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC)
When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B
operates, the line becomes DV and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault. Hence,
Sectionalizing Recloser is opened. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint
Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. Therefore, the load side of Sectionalizing
Recloser can keep the live line. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault, OCR
Function is operated and the load side is disconnected.

MIDpoint Recloser(MID)
When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or
Sectionalizing Recloser operates, the line becomes DV status and if it continues, it is figured as a
permanent fault, then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. After changed to
Alternate setting, when TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. During
TIEpoint Recloser closed, when a fault occurs, MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. After
recovering the fault, connect C/B and when the line becomes LV, the setting is automatically
changed to Primary setting and MIDpoint Recloser is closed.
When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault, OCR Function is operated and disconnects
the load side.

TIEpoint Recloser (TIE)


TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV.
When a fault occurs during automatic closing, the recloser trips once and lockouts.
TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side
and when both side becomes DV.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 65
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

LCD Initial Screen


Recloser type that is selected in Loop control, is displayed on LCD Initial Screen.
Press “ENT” KEY to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode.
LOOP CONTROL [TIE] LOOP CONTROL: [SEC] , [MID], [TIE]
VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ - ]
VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ - ] Display a selected type.
AUTO RESTORE T [ - ]
VS: [DV], [LV]
Display Source side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or
Live line voltage.
VL: [DV], [LV]
Display Load side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or Live
line voltage.
VSDLT: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage
of Recloser’s Source side.
VLDLT: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage
of Recloser’s Load side.
AUTO RESTORE T: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays Restoring status after Loop control operation.

LOOP CONTROL KEY


Use PROGRAM KEY to use Loop control on User interface Panel.
Program 1: Enable/Disables Loop control function.
Lamp is on when Loop control function is Enabled.
SEC, MID can be selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be
selected on OPEN status.

Program 2: Enable/Disables Auto restoration function of


SEC, MID.
Figure 6-3. Loop Control Key Lamp is on when Auto restoration function is enabled.
Auto restoration function is, after loop control operation, Auto
Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restore the preset
values.

66 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.8.1. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select
[LOOP CONTROL] Range NONE, SEC, MID, TIE
>Type Select: NONE
>VRS - S/M: VS Default NONE Step ~
>VRS - Tie: VS
Select the Recloser Type and add Loop Control function.
After selecting, press Program 1 Key to enable Loop Control.
NONE : Loop control is not in use.
SEC : SECtionalizing Recloser
MID : MIDpoint Recloser
TIE : TIEpoint Recloser

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M


[LOOP CONTROL] Range VS, VL
>Type Select: NONE
>VRS - S/M: VS Default VS Step ~
>VRS - Tie: VS
Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used
in SEC, MID.
Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID
VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage

Standard Model, EVRC2A-N uses CVD(Capacitor voltage divider) to


measure the voltage. It measures only A, B, C, R phases, phase S and T
are not measured.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to Tie


[LOOP CONTROL] Range VS, VL, VS&VL
>Type Select: NONE
>VRS - S/M: VS Default VS Step ~
>VRS - Tie: VS
Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE.
TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.

VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage


VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load side
voltage becomes dead line voltage.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 67
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire


[LOOP CONTROL] Range 3PN, 3PP, 1PN(A), 1PN(B), 1PN(C), 1PP(AB), 1PP(BC),
>VS Wire: 3PN
>VL Wire: 1PN(A) 1PP(CA)
>Cng Alt-Mid : OFF
Default 3PN Step ~
Line VS Wire : Select Recloser’s Source side(A,B,C phase) voltage
sensor(CVD or VT) connection type.
Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.
CVD type Control measures A, B, C phase voltage.

3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire


[LOOP CONTROL] Range 1PN(A), 1PN(B), 1PN(C), 1PP(AB), 1PP(BC), 1PP(CA)
>VS Wire: 3PN
>VL Wire: 1PN(A) Default 1PN(A) Step ~
>Cng Alt-Mid : OFF
Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R,S,T phase) voltage
sensor(CVD or VT) connection type.
Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.
Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for CVD type Control S,T
phase are not measured.

1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral


1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A

68 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt- Mid


[LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF, ON
>VS Wire: 3PN
>VL Wire: 1PN(A) Default OFF Step ~
>Cng Alt-Mid : OFF
Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point : Set Value is used in
MID.
Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting,
after set time(LL Regain T).
To use this function, Loop control(setting value) of Primary and
Alternate shall be set as the same.

OFF : Turn off auto change.


ON : Turn on auto change.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt-Tie


[LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF, ON(VS), ON(VL), ON(BOTH)
>Cng Alt-Tie: OFF
>LC After Cl:DISABLE Default OFF Step ~
>LC After Op:DISABLE
Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE.
Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting,
after set time(LL Regain T).
To use this function, Loop control(setting value) of Primary and
Alternate shall be set as the same.

OFF : Turn off auto change.


ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS.
ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL.
ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 69
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Cl


[LOOP CONTROL] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Cng Alt-Tie: OFF
>LC After Cl:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>LC After Op:DISABLE
Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC.
To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by
Manual operation. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is
coming from remote or local. When Loop control function is enabled,
PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is turned on.

DISABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is not


automatically activated.(Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it)
ENABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is automatically
activated.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Op


[LOOP CONTROL] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Cng Alt-Tie: OFF
>LC After Cl:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>LC After Op:DISABLE
Select After Manual Open : Setting Value is used in TIE.
To select Loop control function automatically enable after recloser is
opened by manual operation. Manual open is referred when the
operation signal is coming form remote or local. When Loop control
function is enabled, PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is
turned on.

DISABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is not


automatically activated. (Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it)
ENABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is automatically
activated.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DL


[LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>OT Both DL: 10.00
>Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
>DL V Max(%): 50.0
Open Time on Both Dead Bus : Setting value is used in TIE.

After TIE closed, source and load sides become dead line for a certain
period, TIE opens by Loop control.

70 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Auto Rest’ T


[LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>OT Both DL: 10.00
>Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>DL V Max(%): 50.0
Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC, MID.
This is active when Program 2 on User Interface Panel is enable.

SEC operates Loop control(Automatic Open) if a voltage selected from


“VRS – S/M” becomes dead line. After opened, the voltage becomes
Live Line, a certain period later, restores (Automatic Close).

MID, if a voltage selected form “VRS – S/M” becomes dead line, and
when Loop control(“Chg Alt-Tie” is on, it automatically changes to
Alternate Setting. After Loop control, Live Line becomes Tie Close,
and during operation, it figures as a fault and Trip Lockout. After it
becomes Live line, Restore( auto close and change to Primary setting).

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DL V Max(%)


[LOOP CONTROL] Range 20.0 ~ 70.0 %
>OT Both DL: 10.00
>Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 Default 50.0 Step 0.1 %
>DL V Max(%): 50.0
Dead Bus Maximum Voltage(%) : Sense Dead Line Voltage.
In Live Line, when a voltage is decreased below a set value, it
determines Dead Line.
In Source side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VS Wire”.
In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LL V Min(%)


[LOOP CONTROL] Range 50.0 ~ 85.0 %
>LL V Min(%): 70.0
>DL Pickup T: 50.00 Default 70.0 Step 0.1 %
>LL Regain T: 10.00
Live Bus Minimum Voltage(%) : Sense Live Line Voltage.
In Dead Line, when a voltage is increased over a set value, it
determines Live Line.
In Source side, it is figured form a selected phase from “VS Wire”,
In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 71
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DL Pickup T


[LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>LL V Min(%): 70.0
>DL Pickup T: 50.00 Default 50.00 Step 0.01 sec
>LL Regain T: 10.00
Dead Bus Pickup Time Delay : During “DL Pickup T”, the line
becomes Dead Line and “LL Regain T” Timer shall be operated so that
SEC, MID, TIE can operate.
“DL Pickup T” Timer is the Cumulative Timer to count Dead Line time
while C/B or Recloser is doing re-close operation.
Timer is not reset regardless of Live Line and it is reset by “DL rest T”
Timer. Setting shall be the same or bigger than the sum of C/B or
recloser’s reclosing time.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LL Regain T


[LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>LL V Min(%): 70.0
>DL Pickup T: 50.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
>LL Regain T: 10.00
Live Bus Pickup Time Delay : “DL Pickup T” shall be finished and
during reset time, the line shall not be Live Line.
SEC’s reset Time shall be longer than MID 5 seconds, and MID’s shall
be longer than TIE’s 5 seconds.
When timer is finished, SEC is opened, MID changes Settings from
Primary to Alternate(if Chg Alt-Mid is enable), and TIE is closed
automatically after changing settings form Primary to Alternate(if Chg
Alt-Tie is enable).

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DBRT Time


[LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>LL Regain T: 10.00
>DL Reset T: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>NRT After LC: 10.00
Dead Bus Reset Time : It is a delay timer to reset accumulated time
from “DL Pickup T”. This timer operates when “DL Pickup T” is set
and the line becomes Live line.

72 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / NRT After LC


[LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>LL Regain T: 10.00
>DL Reset T: 5.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
>NRT After LC: 10.00
Non Reclose Time After LC Action : Setting values are used in
MID, TIE.
This timer prevents from Reclosing when recloser operates due to a
fault after Loop control.
After “LL Regain T” and changed Settings, while backward
distributing line operating, if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set
time, MID reclose. MID trips once and lockouts. If a fault occurs and
MID trips after a set time, reclosing is executed.
After “LL Regain T”, when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set
time, TIE also, trips once and lockout. If a fault occurs and TIE trips
after a set time, reclosing is executed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 73
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.8.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram

Figure 6-4. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic

74 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 6-5. MID Point Recloser Logic

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 75
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 6-6. TIE Point Recloser Logic

76 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.9. Loop Control Application


6.9.1. 5-Reclosers Loop Control
For five reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 2 sets of
MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source
side to SEC-MID-TIE.
In “Table 6-2. 5-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2, RC3 are installed for
CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC4, RC5 are installed for CB2 side.

Table 6-2. 5-Reclosers Setting


SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 CB2

Type Select - SEC MID TIE MID SEC -


VS VS VS VS
VRS – S/M - ¬¾¾ ¬¾¾ X ¾¾® ¾¾® -

VRS – Tie - X X VS&VL X X -

VS Wire - 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN -

VL Wire - 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) -

Cng Alt-Mid - X ON X ON X -

Cng Alt-Tie - X X ON X X -

LC After Cl - ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE -

LC After Op - - X ENABLE X - -

OT Both DL - X X 10.00 X X -

Auto Rest’ T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 -

DL V Max(%) - 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 -

LL V Min(%) - 70.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 -

DL Pickup T - 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 -

LL Regain T - 5.00 10.00 15.00 10.00 5.00 -

DL Reset T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 -

NRT After LC - X 10.00 10.00 10.00 X -

PROGRAM 1 - ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE -

PROGRAM 2 - ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE -

Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)

“X” is not used.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 77
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault

Figure 6-7. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates.
“DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
SEC, MID, TIE has the same setting time.
Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
SEC(RC1), MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate.
To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→MID→TIE in turn, MID shall have longer time set
than SEC, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “LL Regain T” is enable,
SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting.
Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically,
and then automatically close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region
shall be alive by backward distributing line.
Step4 : After removing a Fault, close CB1, then, SEC(RC1) automatically close after Auto-
Restoration Time.
Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3), change MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) setting to Primary setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.

78 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault

Figure 6-8. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. When the line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T”
operates.
“DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
MID, TIE point recloser has the same setting time.
Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from MID→TIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than MID.
When “LL Regain T” is enable, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting automatically.
Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished, TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to
Alternate setting.
Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3), MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault.
F2 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward
distributing line.
Step5 : After removing a Fault, close SEC(RC1), then, MID(RC3) automatically changes to
Alternate setting after Auto Restoration Time.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 79
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting.


Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.

5-Reclosers Loop control at F3 Fault

Figure 6-9. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3, MID(RC2) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During MID(RC2) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. When the line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T”
operates.
“DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC3)
operate. When “LL Regain T” is enable, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting
automatically.
Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3), TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault.
F3 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward
distributing line.
Step4 : After removing the fault, close MID(RC3)
Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3), and recover the previous the line as the previous
normal line.

80 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.9.2. 3-Reclosers Loop Control


For three - reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 1 set of
TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE.
In “Table 6-3. 3-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2 are installed for CB1
side. And the source side bushings of RC3 is installed for CB2 side.

Table 6-3. 3-Reclosers Setting


SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 CB2

Type Select - SEC TIE SEC -


VS VS
VRS – S/M - ¬¾¾ X ¾¾® -

VRS – Tie - X VS&VL X -

VS Wire - 3PN 3PN 3PN -

VL Wire - 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) -

Cng Alt-Mid - X X X -

Cng Alt-Tie - X ON X -

LC After Cl - ENABLE X ENABLE -

LC After Op - - ENABLE - -

OT Both DL - X 10.00 X -

Auto Rest’ T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 -

DL V Max(%) - 50.0 50.0 50.0 -

LL V Min(%) - 70.0 70.0 70.0 -

DL Pickup T - 22.0 22.0 22.0 -

LL Regain T - 5.00 10.00 5.00 -

DL Reset T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 -

NRT After LC - X 10.00 X -

PROGRAM 1 - ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE -

PROGRAM 2 - ENABLE X ENABLE -

Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)

“X” is not used.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 81
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault

Figure 6-10. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates.
“DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
SEC, TIE has the same setting time.
Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
SEC(RC1), TIE(RC2) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→TIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than SEC.
When “LL Regain T” is finished, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, TIE(RC2)
automatically changes to Alternate setting and close.
F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward
distributing line.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1, SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto
Restoration Time.
Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to Primary setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.

82 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault

Figure 6-11. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated
time becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates.
Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close.
When closing TIE(RC2), MID(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close SEC(RC1).
Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to Primary setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 83
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7. PROTECTION
Protective Elements Block diagram - ANSI Designations

Figure 7-1. Protective Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations

84 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Protective Elements - ANSI Designations

Table 7-1. Protective Elements -ANSI Designations


Protective Elements ANSI Designations
Four shot recloser 79
Phase fast time overcurrent 51P1
Ground fast time overcurrent 51G1
Negative sequence fast time overcurrent 46(51)-1
Phase delay time overcurrent 51P2
Ground delay time overcurrent 51G2
Negative sequence delay time overcurrent 46(51)-2
Sensitive Earth Fault protection 51SEF
Phase directional time control 67P
Ground directional time control 67G
Negative sequence directional time control 67I2
Directional Sensitive Earth Fault 67SEF
Phase instantaneous high current trip 50P1
Ground instantaneous high current trip 50G1
Negative sequence instantaneous high current trip 46(50)1
Phase High current trip lockout 50P2
Ground High current trip lockout 50G2
Negative sequence High current trip lockout 46(50)2
Under voltage 1 27-1
Under voltage 2 27-2
Over voltage 1 59-1
Over voltage 2 59-2
Under frequency 81U
Over frequency 81O
Synchronism check 25
Cold load pickup
Sequence coordination

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 85
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1. Reclose (79)


After a fault has occurred, the Reclose element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose
interval time expires. The number of operation lockout setting is programmed one to five, and
each reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer.
If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose, the Reclose element will
continue to increment the operating counter. If this continues to the maximum number of the
operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element, the reclose logic lockouts.

If the fault is transient, then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic.

The reclosing element can be disabled in the Primary, Alternate settings by one operating lockout
or by [RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel.

The Reclose Element should be enabled to the following settings.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-PHA


[OPERATIONS] Range 1~5
>Lockout-PHA: 4
Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1
Lockout-SEF: 4
Select the total number of the phase trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the phase trip
operations.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-GND


[OPERATIONS] Range 1~5
Lockout-PHA: 4
>Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1
Lockout-SEF: 4
Select the total number of the ground trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the ground trip
operations.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-SEF


[OPERATIONS] Range 1~5
Lockout-PHA: 4
Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1
>Lockout-SEF: 4
Select the total number of the SEF trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip
operations

86 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-NEQ


[OPERATIONS] Range 1~5
Lockout-GND: 4
Lockout-SEF: 4 Default 4 Step 1
>Lockout-NEQ: 4
Select the total number of the negative sequence trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the negative sequence
trip operations.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-PHA


[OPERATIONS] Range 0~5
Lockout-GND: 4
Lockout-SEF: 4 Default 2 Step 1
>Fast Curve-PHA: 2
Select the number of the phase fast curve operations.
This setting is used to change the number of the phase fast curve
operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-PHA and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-PHA is the number of remaining
phase delay curve operations.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-GND


[OPERATIONS] Range 0~5
Lockout-SEF: 4
Fast Curve-PHA: 2 Default 2 Step 1
>Fast Curve-GND: 2
Select a number for the ground fast curve operations.
This setting is used to change the number of the ground fast curve
operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-GND and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-GND is the number of remaining
ground delay curve operations.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-NEQ


[OPERATIONS] Range 0~5
Fast Curve-PHA: 2
Fast Curve-GND: 2 Default 2 Step 1
>Fast Curve-NEQ: 2
Select a number for the negative sequence fast curve operations.
This setting is used to change the number of the negative sequence fast
curve operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-NEQ and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-NEQ is the number of remaining
negative sequence delay curve operations.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 87
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 1


[INTERVALS] Range 0.50 ~ 600.00 sec
>Reclose 1: 0.60
Reclose 2: 2.00 Default 0.60 Step 0.01 sec
Reclose 3: 15.00
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the
first trip operation and the close operation.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 2


[INTERVALS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Reclose 1: 0.60
>Reclose 2: 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
Reclose 3: 15.00
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the
first trip operation and the close operation.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 3


[INTERVALS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00sec
Reclose 1: 0.60
Reclose 2: 2.00 Default 15.00 Step 0.01
>Reclose 3: 15.00
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the
first trip operation and the close operation.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 4


[INTERVALS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Reclose 2: 2.00
Reclose 3: 15.00 Default 15.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Reclose 4: 15.00
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the
first trip operation and the close operation.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reset T(AR)


[INTERVALS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Reclose 2: 2.00
Reclose 3: 15.00 Default 30.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Reset T(AR): 30.00
Select Reset time for auto reclose.
The Reset time for auto reclose is used for the recloser to automatically
reclose.
Traditionally, the Reset time for auto reclose setting is used to set time
for a delay longer than the incomplete sequence.
If any overcurrent elements are picked up, the reset timer is reloaded.
Reset timer can only count if all the overcurrent elements are cleared.

88 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reset T(LO)


[INTERVALS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Reclose 3: 15.00
Reset T(AR): 30.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Reset T(LO): 10.0
Select the Reset time for lockout.
The auto reclose logic is disabled for a setting time delay after the
recloser is manually/remotely closed. This prevents a fault from manual
reclosing. This delay must be longer than the trip time delay for any
protection not blocked after manual closing.
If no overcurrent trip occurs after a manual close and this timer expires,
the auto reclose logic automatically resets.
Traditionally, the Reset Time from lockout setting is set shorter than the
Reset time for auto reclose setting.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / C/P Wait


[INTERVALS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Reset T(AR): 30.00
Reset T(LO): 10.0 Default 60.00 Step 0.01 sec
>C/P Wait: 60.00
Select the close power waiting time.
This timer is used to set the close power waiting time delay allowed to
reclose. It is activated when the reclose logic is in the reclose cycle
state. If this timer expires, the reclose logic is lockouted.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 89
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.1. Lockout
The lockout state occurs under any of the following conditions :

Ÿ After a fault of distribution systems, the RECLOSE ENABLED LED in user interface panel
is not lighted(ON).
Ÿ When the high current lockout has occurred.
Ÿ The recloser is manually closed and a fault occurs before the expiration of the reset time.
Ÿ When recloser is manually opened.
Ÿ After TRIP occurs, the fault current is not removed or the recloser’s 52a contacts do not
change status of the recloser opened.
Ÿ The close power waiting time delay has expired.

The Lockout State is cleared when the recloser has been manually closed by local/remote control
and the reset time has expired.

The following diagram shows the typical full protection sequence containing 2F2D (two fast and
two delay) operations followed by lockout.

AMP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
FAULT
CURRENT

* LOCK-OUT *
PICKUP
CURRENT

NORMAL
CURRENT
TIME
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
(7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC

Figure 7-2. Protection sequence containing 2F2D operations followed by lockout

90 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.2. Reset
If the faulted current is cleared before the lockout condition, the reclosing sequence
automatically reset after passing the reset time interval.
If the fault condition occurs again during the reset time, the recloser will operate lockout after the
completion of the remaining sequence.
The following block diagram shows the reset sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the
fault current is cleared.

AMP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
FAULT
CURRENT
AUTO RESET
TIME
* RESET *
PICKUP
CURRENT

NOMAL
CURRENT
TIME

(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC

Figure 7-3. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 91
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P)


The EVRC2A-N has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time overcurrent element
contained in the EVR2A, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs.
The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for
distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The phase
time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an
inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial,
time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that
time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and
operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The phase time
overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION
ENABLED] in user interface panel.

Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to
respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A-N and other external
devices on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current
curves are included in the EVRC2A-N.
A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating custom’s time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The phase time delay reset mode applies to
the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other
instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution
system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when
the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.

If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote
control or via SCADA, the phase time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a
period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.

92 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Phase Pickup Current Setup


The following setting is used to program the phase pickup current.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase


[PICKUP CURRENT xCT] Range OFF, 0.04 ~ 3.20
>Phase: 0.50
Ground: 0.25 Default 0.50 Step 0.01
S.E.F: OFF
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the source CTs nominal current.
The pickup current is the threshold current at which the phase time
overcurrent element starts timing. The dropout threshold is 98% of the
pickup threshold curves as a multiple of the source CT. For example, if
1000:1 CTs are used and a phase pickup of 500 amps is required for the
phase time overcurrent element, enter 0.50

Phase Fast Time Overcurrent Setup


The following setting is used to program the phase fast time overcurrent element.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Function


[PHASE FAST] Range TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~
Curve: ANSI-STI
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP condition, TRIP and any other selected output relays
operate.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Relays(0-8)


[PHASE FAST] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: TRIP
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Curve: ANSI-STI
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal.
0000(off) : No Output Relay is selected.
1234 : Operate output signal through 1, 2, 3, 4 Output Relay.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 93
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Curve


[PHASE FAST] Range ANSI-MI, ANSI-NI, … , KG(165)
Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default ANSI-STI Step ~
>Curve: ANSI-STI
Select the desired curve type :
ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse,
Definite Time(1s ,10s)
IEC : Standard, Very, Extremely, Long, Short Inverse
ESB : Normally, Very, Long Very Inverse
User programmable curves : U1,U2,U3,U4
McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Time Dial


[PHASE FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Relays(0-8): OFF
Curve: ANSI-STI Default 0.50 Step 0.01
>Time Dial: 0.50
A time dial setpoint allows shifting of the selected base curve in the
vertical time axis.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Time Adder


[PHASE FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: ANSI-STI
Time Dial: 0.50 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Adder: 0.00
An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the
time overcurrent curve function.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / M.R.T


[PHASE FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Dial: 0.50
Time Adder: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>M.R.T: 0.00
The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip, even
if the time delay is shorter.
This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse
coordination.

94 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Reset Method


[PHASE FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
Time Adder: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 Default INST Step ~
>Reset Method: INST
Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy
Capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy
capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less
than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below
the dropout threshold of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced.
Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous
and Linear. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications
with other relays, such as most static units, which set the energy
capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset
threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical units.

Phase Delay Time Overcurrent Setup


The phase delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the phase fast time
overcurrent.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 95
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G)


The EVRC2A-N has two ground time overcurrent elements. The ground time overcurrent
element in the EVRC2A-N is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current
inputs. The ground time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element
for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The
ground time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for
an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial,
time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that
time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and
operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time
overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION
ENABLED] and [GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel.

Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to
closely coordinate with other protection elements within the EVRC2A-N and other external
devices on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current
curves are included in the EVRC2A-N.
A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The ground time delay reset mode applies to
the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other
instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution
system. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when
the current level measured by the EVRC2A-N drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.

If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote
control or via SCADA, the ground time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a
period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.

96 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Ground Pickup Current Setup


The following setting is used to program the phase pickup current.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground


[PICKUP CURRENT xCT] Range OFF, 0.02 ~ 3.20
Phase: 0.50
>Ground: 0.25 Default 0.25 Step 0.01
S.E.F: OFF
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the source CTs nominal current.
The pickup current is the threshold current at which the ground time
overcurrent element starts timing. The dropout threshold is 98% of the
pickup threshold curves as a multiple of the source CT. For example, if
1000:1 CTs are used and a phase pickup of 250 amps is required for the
ground time overcurrent element, enter 0.25

Ground Fast Time Overcurrent Setup


The following setting is used to program the ground fast time overcurrent element.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Function


[GROUND FAST] Range TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~
Curve: ANSI-STI
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, which will operate the Trip.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP&AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Relays(0-8)


[GROUND FAST] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: TRIP
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Curve: ANSI-STI

Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 97
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Curve


[GROUND FAST] Range ANSI-MI, ANSI-NI, … , KG(165)
Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default ANSI-STI Step ~
>Curve: ANSI-STI
Select the desired curve type :
ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse,
Definite Time(1s ,10s)
IEC : Standard, Very, Extremely, Long, Short Inverse
ESB : Normally, Very, Long Very Inverse
User programmable curves : U1,U2,U3,U4
McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Time Dial


[GROUND FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Relays(0-8): OFF
Curve: ANSI-STI Default 0.50 Step 0.01
>Time Dial: 0.50
A time dial setpoint allows shifting of the selected base curve in the
vertical time axis.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Time Adder


[GROUND FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: ANSI-STI
Time Dial: 0.50 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Adder: 0.00
An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the
time overcurrent curve function.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / M.R.T


[GROUND FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Dial: 0.50
Time Adder: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>M.R.T: 0.00
The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip, even
if the time delay is shorter. This function can be useful for other
protective device and line fuse coordination.

98 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Reset Method


[GROUND FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
Time Adder: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 Default INST Step ~
>Reset Method: INST
Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy
Capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy
capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less
than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below
the dropout threshold of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced.
Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous
and Linear. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications
with other relays, such as most static units, which set the energy
capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset
threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical units.

Ground Delay Time Overcurrent Setup


The ground delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the ground fast time
overcurrent.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 99
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)


The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase
to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The
sensitivity of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and
the accuracy of CTs. For SEF element, EVRC2A-N has the separate SEF terminal on side panel.
This input can be connected in series with the provided phase CT’s (standard) or connected to a
separate window type ZCT.
The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus current . The SEF element is enabled in
the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [SEF ENABLED]
in user interface panel.

For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero
sequence voltage(V0). The CVD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded.

The SEF element in the following three settings should be enabled.

SEF Pickup Current Setup


PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / S.E.F
[PICKUP CURRENT xCT] Range OFF, 0.005~0.160
Phase: 0.50
Ground: 0.25 Default OFF Step 0.001
>S.E.F: OFF
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the source CTs nominal current.
The pickup current is the threshold current at which the SEF element
starts timing. For example, if 1000:1 CTs are used and a phase pickup
of 10 amps is required for sensitive earth fault element, enter 0.010

SEF Element Setup


PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Function
[ SEF ELEMENT ] Range TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~
Time Delay: 1.00
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

100 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Relays(0-8)


[ SEF ELEMENT ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: TRIP
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Time Delay: 1.00

Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Time Delay


[ SEF ELEMENT ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 1.00
The Time delay of Sensitive Earth Fault setting programs a definite
time delay for the Sensitive Earth Fault. If set to zero, phase high
current trip operates instantaneously.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 101


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46)


The EVRC2A-N has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence
element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence
overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The
negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping
using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current pickup value,
curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type.
The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and
[PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent
element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A-N and other
external devices on the distribution system.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset
mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to
coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective
equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element
will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for
one cycle.

If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote
control or via SCADA, the negative sequence time overcurrent element is prevented from
tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.

NEG Pickup Current Setup


The following setting is used to program the NEQ pickup current.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq


[PICKUP CURRENT xCT] Range OFF, 0.04 ~ 3.20
Ground: 0.25
S.E.F: OFF Default OFF Step 0.01
>NEG Seq: OFF
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the source CTs nominal current.
The pickup current is the threshold current at which the phase time
overcurrent element starts timing. The dropout threshold is 98% of the
pickup threshold curves as a multiple of the source CT. For example, if
1000:1 CTs are used and a phase pickup of 500 amps is required for the
phase time overcurrent element, enter 0.50

102 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Negative Sequence Fast Time Overcurrent Setup


The following setting is used to program the negative sequence fast time overcurrent element.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Function


[NEG SEQ FAST] Range TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~
Curve: ANSI-STI
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP condition, TRIP and any other selected output relays
operate.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Relays(0-8)


[NEG SEQ FAST] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: TRIP
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Curve: ANSI-STI

Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Curve


[NEG SEQ FAST] Range ANSI-MI, ANSI-NI, … , KG(165)
Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default ANSI-STI Step ~
>Curve: ANSI-STI
Select the desired curve type :
ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse,
Definite Time(1s ,10s)
IEC : Standard, Very, Extremely, Long, Short Inverse
ESB : Normally, Very, Long Very Inverse
User programmable curves : U1,U2,U3,U4
McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Dial


[NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Relays(0-8): OFF
Curve: ANSI-SI Default 0.50 Step 0.01
>Time Dial: 0.50
A time dial setpoint allows shifting of the selected base curve in the
vertical time axis.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 103


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Adder


[NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: ANSI-STI
Time Dial: 0.50 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Adder: 0.00
An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the
time overcurrent curve function.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / M.R.T


[NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Dial: 0.50
Time Adder: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>M.R.T: 0.00
The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip, even
if the time delay is shorter. This function can be useful for other
protective device and line fuse coordination.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Reset Method


[NEG SEQ FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
Time Adder: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 Default INST Step ~
>Reset Method: INST
Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy
Capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy
capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less
than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below
the dropout threshold of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced.
Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous
and Linear. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications
with other relays, such as most static units, which set the energy
capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset
threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical units.

Negative Sequence Delay Time Overcurrent Setup


The negative sequence delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the negative
sequence fast time overcurrent.

104 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1)


The EVRC2A-N has a phase high current trip element. The phase high current trip element in the
EVRC2A-N, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase
high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of phase high current trip element should be set for equal to or faster than the
phase time overcurrent elements. The phase high current trip element is enabled in the Primary,
Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel.
Phase high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.

The phase high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for phase
high current trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Function


[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Pickup(xCT): 4.00
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Relays(0-8)


[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Pickup(xCT): 4.00

Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Pickup(xCT)


[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range 1.00 ~ 20.00
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 4.00 Step 0.01
>Pickup(xCT): 4.00
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the source CTs nominal current.
The pickup current is the threshold current at which the phase high
current trip element starts timing. For example, if 1000:1 CTs are used
and a phase pickup of 4000 amps is required for the high current trip
element, enter 4.00

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 105


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Time Delay


[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(xCT): 4.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite
time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high
current trip operates instantaneously.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Active Trip


[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(xCT): 4.00
Time Delay: 0.00 Default OFF Step 1
>Active Trip: OFF
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate.
If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the
second trip operation and every following trip operation.

106 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1)


The EVRC2A-N has a ground high current trip element. The ground high current trip element in
the EVRC2A-N is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The
ground high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of ground high current trip overcurrent element should be set for equal to or
faster than the ground time overcurrent elements. The ground high current trip element is enabled
in the Primary, Alternate settings both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [GROUND
ENABLED] in user interface panel. Ground high current trip is not affected by the cold load
pickup scheme.
The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground
high current trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Function


[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Pickup(xCT): 4.00
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Relays(0-8)


[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Pickup(xCT): 4.00

Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Pickup(xCT)


[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range 1.00 ~ 20.00
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 4.00 Step 0.01
>Pickup(xCT): 4.00
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the source CTs nominal current.
The pickup current is the threshold current at which the phase high
current trip element starts timing. For example, if 1000:1 CTs are used
and a phase pickup of 4000 amps is required for the high current trip
element, enter 4.00

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 107


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Time Delay


[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(xCT): 4.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite
time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high
current trip operates instantaneously.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Active Trip


[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(xCT): 4.00
Time Delay: 0.00 Default OFF Step 1
>Active Trip: OFF
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate.
If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the
second trip operation and every following trip operation.

108 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1)


The negative sequence high current trip in the EVRC2A-N is set based on CT secondary current
as connected to the current inputs. The negative sequence high current trip element provides a
definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of negative sequence high current trip element should be set equal to or faster
than the negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence high current trip
element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION] on user interface
panel.
The negative sequence high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.

The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for
negative sequence high current trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Function


[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Pickup(xCT): 4.00
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Relays(0-8)


[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Pickup(xCT): 4.00
Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Pickup(xCT)


[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range 1.00 ~ 20.00
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 4.00 Step 0.01
>Pickup(xCT): 4.00
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the source CTs nominal current.
The pickup current is the threshold current at which the phase high
current trip element starts timing. For example, if 1000:1 CTs are used
and a phase pickup of 4000 amps is required for the high current trip
element, enter 4.00

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 109


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Time Delay


[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(xCT): 4.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite
time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high
current trip operates instantaneously.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Active Trip


[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(xCT): 4.00
Time Delay: 0.00 Default OFF Step 1
>Active Trip: OFF
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate.
If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the
second trip operation and every following trip operation.

110 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2)


The EVRC2A-N has a phase high current lockout element. The phase high current lockout
element in the EVRC2A-N is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current
inputs. The phase high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current.

When high current lockout element is enabled, high current lockout element is operated prior to
any other phase protection elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value,
Lockout is operated.
The phase high current lockout element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to
the full operation to lockout, time delay and fault current.
This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case
of permanent fault.

The operating time of phase high current lockout element should be set for equal to or faster than
and phase high current trip element. The phase high current lockout element is enabled in the
Primary, Alternate setting and [PROTECTION ENABLED] in user interface panel.
The phase high current lockout element is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.

The phase high current lockout element in the following five setting should be enabled for phase
high current trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Function


[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~
Pickup(xCT): 8.00
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Relays(0-8)


[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Pickup(xCT): 8.00

Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 111


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Pickup(xCT)


[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range 1.00 ~ 20.00
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 8.00 Step 0.01
>Pickup(xCT): 8.00
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the source CTs nominal current.
The pickup current is the threshold current at which the phase high
current lockout element starts timing. For example, if 1000:1 CTs are
used and a phase pickup of 8000 amps is required for the high current
lockout element, enter 8.00

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Time Delay


[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(xCT): 8.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite
time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high
current trip operates instantaneously.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Active Trip


[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(xCT): 8.00
Time Delay: 0.00 Default OFF Step 1
>Active Trip: OFF
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate.
If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the
second trip operation and every following trip operation.

112 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2)


The EVRC2A-N has a ground high current lockout element. The ground high current lockout
element in the EVRC2A-N, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current
inputs. The ground high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of ground high current lockout overcurrent element should be set for equal to
or faster than the ground high current trip element. The ground high current lockout element is
enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and
[GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel. The ground high current lockout is not affected
by the cold load pickup scheme.

The ground high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for
ground high current lockout.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Function


[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Pickup(xCT): 8.00
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Relays(0-8)


[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Pickup(xCT): 8.00

Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Pickup(xCT)


[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range 1.00 ~ 20.00
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 8.00 Step 0.01
>Pickup(xCT): 8.00
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the source CTs nominal current.
The pickup current is the threshold current at which the phase high
current lockout element starts timing. For example, if 1000:1 CTs are
used and a phase pickup of 8000 amps is required for the high current
lockout element, enter 8.00

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 113


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Time Delay


[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(xCT): 8.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite
time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high
current trip operates instantaneously.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Active Trip


[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(xCT): 8.00
Time Delay: 0.00 Default OFF Step 1
>Active Trip: OFF
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate.
If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the
second trip operation and every following trip operation.

114 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2)


The EVRC2A-N has a negative sequence high current lockout element. Negative sequence high
current lockout element in the EVRC2A-N is set based on CT secondary current as connected to
the current inputs. The negative sequence high current lockout element provides a definite time
delay characteristic versus current.
The negative sequence high current lockout element should be set equal to or faster than the
negative sequence high current trip element. The negative sequence high current lockout element
is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface
panel.
Negative sequence high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.

The negative sequence high current lockout element in the following five settings should be
enabled for the negative sequence high current lockout.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Function


[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Pickup(xCT): 8.00
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Relays(0-8)


[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Pickup(xCT): 8.00

Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 115


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Pickup(xCT)


[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range 1.00 ~ 20.00
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 8.00 Step 0.01
>Pickup(xCT): 8.00
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the source CTs nominal current.
The pickup current is the threshold current at which the phase high
current lockout element starts timing. For example, if 1000:1 CTs are
used and a phase pickup of 8000 amps is required for the high current
lockout element, enter 8.00

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Time Delay


[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(xCT): 8.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite
time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high
current trip operates instantaneously.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Active Trip


[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(xCT): 8.00
Time Delay: 0.00 Default OFF Step 1
>Active Trip: OFF
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate.
If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the
second trip operation and every following trip operation.

116 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.12. Cold Load Pickup


The cold load pickup feature is operated to prevent TRIP from the overcurrent elements when an
inrush current occurs during the manual closing by local/remote control. The setting values of
Cold Load Pickup feature for phase, ground, SEF, negative sequence overcurrent elements can
be programmed separately.

If cold load pickup feature is activated and the Recloser is closed manually by local/remote
control, the overcurrent elements are operated considering the cold load pickup feature.

EVRC2A-N can be programmed to prevent the overcurrent elements and to raise the pickup
level of time overcurrent elements when a cold load pickup feature is detected. Under normal
operating conditions, the actual load on the distribution system is less than the maximum
connected load. When the distribution system is closed after a prolonged outage, the inrush
current may be above some overcurrent settings. Such the overcurrent elements are operated due
to the fast overcurrent elements are disabled and the delay overcurrent elements and SEF element
are activated.

If the fault of the distribution system occurs, the overcurrent element is operated due to the cold
load pickup feature and the recloser will be lockout after one TRIP.

The cold load pickup feature is initiated and overcurrent settings are altered when the recloser is
opened for an amount of time greater than the outage time. The cold load pickup feature is
immediately activated by asserting the cold load pickup current. The overcurrent settings are
returned to normal after any phase current is restored to the nominal load, and then a timer of
duration equal to the restore minimum time expires.

Outage
Restore Minimum Time
Time
Current

Inrrush Current 1

TRIP
Cold load
Pickup Level
Overcurrent
Pickup Level

Inrrush Current 2

Time

Figure 7-4. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 117


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

The cold load pickup feature will be operated by the following Rules;

When The cold load pickup feature is selected for ON and the cold load pickup level for
overcurrent elements are preset, The cold load pickup feature is activated by the overcurrent
higher than the cold load pickup level that is detected during the manual closing by local/remote
control.
The cold load pickup feature is activated with the delay time overcurrent curve only when the
inrush current higher than the cold load pickup level or the fault current comes into existence.
If transient current remains below the cold load pickup level and the restore minimum time
expires, CLPU sequence is changed to the normal sequence. At this time, the cold load pickup
level is restored to the nominal pickup current. When fault current, the sequence will be lockout
after one TRIP.
If High Current Lockout feature is enabled and fault current is higher than the High Current
Lockout setting, High Current Lockout feature will be operated prior to the cold load pickup
feature.

Non Trip Area Trip Area


Time

Delay Curve

Current
Overcurrent Cold load
Pickup Level Pickup Level

Figure 7-5. The Cold Load Pickup Characteristic

118 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

The Cold Load Pickup feature in the following settings should be enabled.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Function


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~
PHA(xCT): 2.00
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Relays(0-8)


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: TRIP
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
PHA(xCT): 2.00

Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / PHA(xCT)


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 1.00 ~ 20.00
Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 2.00 Step 0.01
>PHA(xCT): 2.00
Selects the raised pickup level for the phase overcurrent element while
cold load pickup feature is activated.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / GND(xCT)


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 1.00 ~ 20.00
Relays(0-8): OFF
PHA(xCT): 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01
>GND(xCT): 2.00
Selects the raised pickup level for the ground overcurrent element
while cold load pickup feature is activated.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / SEF(xCT)


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 1.00 ~ 20.00
PHA(xCT): 2.00
GND(xCT): 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01
>SEF(xCT): 2.00
Selects the raised pickup level for the SEF overcurrent element while
cold load pickup feature is activated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 119


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / NEQ(xCT)


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 1.00 ~ 20.00
GND(xCT): 2.00
SEF(xCT): 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01
>NEQ(xCT): 2.00
Selects the raised pickup level for the negative sequence overcurrent
element while cold load pickup feature is activated.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Outage Time


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
SEF(xCT): 2.00
NEQ(xCT): 2.00 Default 10.0 Step 0.01 sec
>Outage Time: 10.0
Select the outage time required for a open of recloser to be considered
cold.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Time


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
NEQ(xCT): 2.00
Outage Time: 10.0 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>RMT Time: 5.00
Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush load.
The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for
overcurrent detection from cold load pickup value back to nominal
pickup level.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Func-PHA


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range OFF, ON
Outage Time: 10.0
RMT Time: 5.00 Default ON Step ~
>RMT Func-PHA: ON
When the cold load pickup is active and RMT Func-PHA = ON, the
raised phase pickup level for phase overcurrent element is restored the
nominal pickup level if the restore minimum time expires.
If the cold load pickup is active and RMT Func-PHA = OFF, the
raised phase pickup level for phase overcurrent element is restored only
the nominal pickup level when the cold load reset time expires.

120 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Func-GND


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range OFF, ON
RMT Time: 5.00
RMT Func-PHA: ON Default ON Step ~
>RMT Func-GND: ON
When the cold load pickup is active and RMT Func-GND = ON, the
raised ground pickup level for ground overcurrent element is restored
the nominal pickup level if the restore minimum time expires.
If the cold load pickup is active and RMT Func-GND = OFF, the
raised ground pickup level for ground overcurrent element is restored
only the nominal pickup level when the cold load reset time expires.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Func-SEF


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range OFF, ON
RMT Func-PHA: ON
RMT Func-GND: ON Default ON Step ~
>RMT Func-SEF: ON
When the cold load pickup is active and RMT Func-SEF = ON, the
raised SEF pickup level for SEF overcurrent element is restored the
nominal pickup level if the restore minimum time expires.
If the cold load pickup is active and RMT Func-SEF = OFF, the raised
SEF pickup level for SEF overcurrent element is restored only the
nominal pickup level when the cold load reset time expires.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Func-NEQ


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range OFF, ON
RMT Func-GND: ON
RMT Func-SEF: ON Default ON Step ~
>RMT Func-NEQ: ON
When the cold load pickup is active and RMT Func-NEQ = ON, the
raised negative sequence(I2) pickup level for I2 overcurrent element is
restored the nominal pickup level if the restore minimum time expires.
If the cold load pickup is active and RMT Func-NEQ = OFF, the
raised I2 pickup level for I2 overcurrent element is restored only the
nominal pickup level when the cold load reset time expires.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Reset Time


[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
RMT Func-SEF: ON
RMT Func-NEQ: ON Default 0.60 Step 0.01 sec
>Reset Time: 0.60
Select the cold load reset time required for the inrush load.
If the cold load currents drops below nominal pickup levels, the cold
load pickup feature is returned the normal sequence when the cold load
reset time expires.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 121


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.13. Directional Controls (67)


The directional Controls provide time protection in the direction of power flow. The directional
Controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding
faults in different directions. The directional controls are composed of phase, neutral, sensitive
ground, and negative sequence overcurrent elements.

If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in
forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected
Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all
directional controls, add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect
operation.

The directional controls have each three settings. The directional controls settings can be
different in the Primary and Alternate settings.

NOTE : In case of CVD type Recloser, EVRC2A-N only measures voltages without checking
directional elements.

7.13.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P)


The positive sequence voltage V1 provides the direction of phase pole in the power system.
The phase direction is determined as comparing the positive sequence voltage(V1) to the
direction of the positive sequence current(I1). The maximum torque angle is set between ∠0 to
∠359 degree.
The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of ∠300 degree over V1.
If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the phase direction control will
lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the phase
overcurrent element, which is non-directional.

The phase direction control can be programmed for non-direction or to provide a trip for current
flow in the forward or reverse direction only.

Following diagram shows the phasor diagram for I1 directional polarization in the complex plane.

122 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
V1

Typical Fault Angle

Ze
ro
T
ine

orq
ueL

ue
I1 T orq

Lin
um
xim

e
M a

Maximum Torque Angle :


set 300 degree

ard
rw
Fo

rse
ve
Re

Figure 7-6. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization

The phase direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / Type


[PHASE DIRECTION] Range OFF, FOR, REV
>Type: OFF
M.T.A: 300 Default OFF Step ~
M.P.A: 0.20
OFF : None direction
FOR : Forward direction
REV : Reverse direction

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.T.A


[PHASE DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: OFF
>M.T.A: 300 Default 300 Step 1 degree
M.P.A: 0.20
Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle
setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing
voltage.
For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be
approximately ∠30∼∠60 degree

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 123


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.P.V


[PHASE DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 1.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
Type: OFF
M.T.A: 300 Default 0.20 Step 0.01
>M.P.A: 0.20
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage as a fraction of the secondary
nominal voltage.

PRIMARY SETTING/PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / BLOCK OC


[PHASE DIRECTION] Range NO, YES
M.T.A: 300
M.P.A: 0.20 Default NO Step ~
>BLOCK OC: NO
The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions
when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage.
If BLOCK OC = NO,
then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted.
If BLOCK OC = YES,
then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked.

7.13.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)


The zero sequence voltage 3V0 provides the direction of ground control in the power system. The
ground direction is determined as comparing the zero sequence voltage(3V0) to the direction of
the zero sequence current(Ig). The Maximum Torque Angle is set between ∠0 to ∠359 degree.
The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of ∠135 degree over 3V0.
If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the ground direction control
will lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the
ground overcurrent element, which is non-directional.

The ground direction control can be programmed to either non-direction or provide a trip for
current flow in the forward or reverse direction only.

The following diagram shows the phasor diagram for Ig directional polarization in the complex
plane.

124 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

-V0

ne
Li
ue
Fault Current

rq
Ze

To
Ig

ro

um
To

im
rq

ax
ue

M
Li
ne

d
ar
rw
Fo
e
rs
ve
Re

Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
V0

Figure 7-7. Phasor Diagram for Ig Directional Polarization

The ground direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / GROUND DIRECTION / Type


[GROUND DIRECTION] Range OFF, FOR, REV
>Type: OFF
M.T.A: 135 Default OFF Step ~
M.P.A: 0.20
OFF : None direction
FOR : Forward direction
REV : Reverse direction

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / GROUND DIRECTION / M.T.A


[GROUND DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: OFF
>M.T.A: 135 Default 135 Step 1 degree
M.P.A: 0.20
Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting
determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage.
For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the
ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠135 degree.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum
torque angle will be approximately ∠90 degree.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 125


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.P.V


[GROUND DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 1.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
Type: OFF
M.T.A: 135 Default 0.20 Step 0.01
>M.P.A: 0.20
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage.
For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this
M.P.V will be approximately 0.20 x VT.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the M.P.V
will be approximately 0.10 x VT.

PRIMARY SETTING/PROTECTION/DIRECTION/GROUND DIRECTION/BLOCK OC


[GROUND DIRECTION] Range NO, YES
M.T.A: 135
M.P.A: 0.20 Default NO Step ~
>BLOCK OC: NO
The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions
when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage.
If BLOCK OC = NO,
then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted.
If BLOCK OC = YES,
then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked.

7.13.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF)


The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the ground directional controls.

7.13.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46))


The negative sequence voltage V2 provides the direction of negative sequence pole in the power
system. The negative sequence direction control is determined as comparing the negative
sequence voltage(V2) to the direction of the negative sequence current(I2). The Maximum Torque
Angle is set between ∠0 to ∠359 degree. The factory default value for maximum torque angle
has a lead of ∠135 degree over V2.
If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the negative sequence direction
control will lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to
the negative sequence overcurrent element which is non-directional.

The negative sequence direction control can be programmed for non-direction or to provide a trip
for current flow in the forward or reverse direction only.

126 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

The following diagram shows the phasor diagram for I2 directional polarization in the complex
plane.

-V2

ne
Li
ue
Fault Current

rq
Ze

To
I2
ro

um
To

im
rq

ax
ue

M
Li
ne

Maximum Torque Angle :


set 135 degree

d
ar
rw
Fo
e
rs
ve
Re

Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
V2

Figure 7-8. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization

The negative sequence directional controls in the following four settings should be enabled.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / Type


[NEQ DIRECTION] Range OFF, FOR, REV
>Type: OFF
M.T.A: 135 Default OFF Step ~
M.P.A: 0.20
OFF : None direction
FOR : Forward direction
REV : Reverse direction

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 127


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / M.T.A


[NEQ DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: OFF
>M.T.A: 135 Default 135 Step 1 degree
M.P.A: 0.20
Enter the maximum torque angle. The maximum torque angle setting
determines the directional operating current for the polarizing voltage.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / M.P.V


[NEQ DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 1.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
Type: OFF
M.T.A: 135 Default 0.20 Step 0.01
>M.P.A: 0.20
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage.
For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this
M.P.V will be approximately 0.20 x VT.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the M.P.V
will be approximately 0.10 x VT.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / BLOCK OC


[NEQ DIRECTION] Range NO, YES
M.T.A: 135
M.P.A: 0.20 Default NO Step ~
>BLOCK OC: NO
The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions
when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage.
If BLOCK OC = NO,
then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted.
If BLOCK OC = YES,
then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked.

128 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.14. Undervoltage (27)


Two undervoltage elements are provided for trip, alarm and control when the voltage drops
below a specified voltage for a specified time.
The undervoltage element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings. The
undervoltage element can be selected the type of operation required with any one phase, any two
phase and three phase.
The undervoltage element can be used to supervise that torque control other overcurrent
protective elements.
When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the undervoltage element is
disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all
undervoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect
operation.

Undervoltage 1 Setup
The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Function


[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Pickup(xVT): 0.70
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Relays(0-8)


[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Pickup(xVT): 0.70

Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 129


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup(xVT)


[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage)
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 0.70 Step 0.01
>Pickup(xVT): 0.70
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage.
For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is
required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(70/100) = 0.70 ×
VT for the pickup.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Time Delay


[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(xVT): 0.70 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay : 5.00

Select the definite time delay.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Min. V(xVT)


[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage)
Pickup(xVT): 0.70
Time Delay : 5.00 Default 0.10 Step 0.01
>Min. V(xVT): 0.10
Enter the minimum voltage for the undervoltage.
Used to prevent the undervoltage 1 element for voltage below this
level. Setting to 0.10 xVT will allow a dead line to be considered a trip
condition.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup Type


[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 1P, 2P, 3P
Time Delay : 5.00
Min. V(xVT): 0.10 Default 1P Step ~
>Pickup Type: 1P
Select the type of phase required for operation.
1P : Function operates when one or more than one phase voltage value
is under the pickup voltage level.
2P : Function operates when two or more than two phase voltage
values are under the pickup voltage level.
3P : Function operates when all three phase voltage values are under
the pickup voltage level.

Undervoltage 2 Setup
The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.

130 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.15. Overvoltage (59)


Two overvoltage elements are provided for trip, alarm and control when the voltage rises above a
specified voltage for a specified time.
The overvoltage element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings . The overvoltage
element can be selected the type of operation required with any one phase, any two phase and
three phase.
When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the overvoltage element is disabled
from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all overvoltage
elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.

Overvoltage 1 Setup
The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Function


[OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Pickup(xVT): 1.20
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Relays(0-8)


[OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Pickup(xVT): 1.20

Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup(xVT)


[OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25 xVT
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 1.20 Step 0.01
>Pickup(xVT): 1.20
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage.
For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100 V, and an alarm is
required whenever the voltage exceeds 120 V, enter 120 / 100 = 1.20
for the pickup.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 131


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Time Delay


[OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(xVT): 1.20 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay : 5.00

Select the definite time delay.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup Type


[OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range 1P, 2P, 3P
Pickup(xVT): 1.20
Time Delay : 5.00 Default 1P Step ~
>Pickup Type: 1P
Select the type of phase required for operation.
1P : Function operates when one or more than one phase voltage value
is over the pickup voltage level.
2P : Function operates when two or more than two phase voltage
values are over the pickup voltage level.
3P : Function operates when all three phase voltage values are over the
pickup voltage level.

Overvoltage 2 Setup
The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.

132 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.16. Frequency(81)
EVRC2A-N has underfrequency and overfrequency elements to detect unusual frequency in
power system. Explanation for each element is below.

Underfrequency (81U)
Underfrequency element is provided for trip, alarm and control when the frequency drops below
a specified frequency setting for a specified time delay.
The underfrequency element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings.
The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for
Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.

The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent
incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the underfrequency
is disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods.

Overfrequency (81O)
Overfrequency element is provided for trip, alarm and control when the frequency rise above a
specified frequency setting for a specified time delay.
The overfrequency element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings.
The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for
Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.

The overfrequency minimum voltage and overfrequency minimum current are used to prevent
incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the overfrequency is
disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods.

Frequency Setup
The underfrequency and overfrequency element should be enabled to the following settings.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Function


[FREQUENCY] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 133


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Relays(0-8)


[FREQUENCY] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00

Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Underfreqency Pickup(Hz)


[[FREQUENCY] Range 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 55.00 Step 0.01 Hz
>Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For
example, if the system frequency is 60㎐, and load shedding is required
at 55.00㎐, enter 55.00 for this setting.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Underfreqency Time Delay


[FREQUENCY] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Under TD: 2.00

Select the definite time delay for underfrequency.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Overfreqency Pickup(Hz)


[[FREQUENCY] Range 50.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Under TD: 2.00 Default 65.00 Step 0.01 Hz
>Over Pu(Hz): 65.00
Enter the level of which the overfrequency element is to pickup. For
example, if the system frequency is 60㎐, and load shedding is required
at 65.00㎐, enter 65.00 for this setting.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Overfreqency Time Delay


[FREQUENCY] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Under TD: 2.00
Over Pu(Hz): 65.00 Default 6.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Over TD: 6.00

Select the definite time delay for Overfrequency.

134 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Min. V(xVT)


[FREQUENCY] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25
>Over TD: 6.00
>Min. V(xVT): 0.10 Default 0.10 Step 0.01
>Min. I(xCT): 0.01
Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the frequency element to
Operate.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Min. I(xCT)


[FREQUENCY] Range 0.01 ~ 3.20
>Over TD: 6.00
>Min. V(xVT): 0.10 Default 0.01 Step 0.01
>Min. I(xCT): 0.01
Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the
frequency element to operate.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / NFCL Func’


[FREQUENCY] Range OFF, ON
>Min. I(xCT): 0.01
>NFCL Func’: OFF Default OFF Step ~
>NFCL TD: 60.0
Enable or disable “CLOSE” function when the frequency becomes
normal.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / NFCL TD


[FREQUENCY] Range 0.0 ~ 6000.0 sec
>Min. I(xCT): 0.01
>NFCL Func’: OFF Default 60.0 Step 0.1
>NFCL TD: 60.0

Set the time delay before “CLOSE” operation.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 135


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.17. Other Element


7.17.1. Sequence Coordination
When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems, EVRC2A-N
contains Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in
both of Back-up and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault. Sequence Coordination
feature is activated only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up
Recloser detects a fault current.

The following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature.

1) The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip
operations and identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected
in series.
2) The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series.
3) To coordinate the protection characteristics, an additional delay operation time (at least 100
ms) should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser, not to
those of Down-line Reclosers.
4) The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all
Down-line Reclosers. This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser
during the reclose operation of Down-lines.

The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled to the following settings.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / Seq' Coordi'


[ OTHER ELEMENT ] Range OFF, ON
>Seq’ Coordi’: OFF
L.O Priority: GND Default OFF Step ~
F/I Reset: AUTO
Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary
operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are
connected in series.

If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.


If function = ON, the feature is operational.

136 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

As shown in “Figure 7-9. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram”, if Sequence


Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in
distribution systems, the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements.
During the count at the Back-up Recloser, if the distribution system is restored to normal by
TRIP with Down-line Recloser , the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is
increased one step.
Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at
the last sequence of the full sequence. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP, Sequence
Coordination function can not be operated.

Increase Trip Counter without Trip

Starting
Reset Time
Counter

Close

Back Up EVR 1 Open

Close
Down line EVR 2
Lockout Status
Open

Time
Faulted

Figure 7-9. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram

7.17.2. Other Element


PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / L.O Priority
[OTHER ELEMENT] Range PHA, GND
Seq’ Coordi’: OFF
>L.O Priority: GND Default GND Step ~
F/I Reset: AUTO
Lockout priority
PHA : Phase prior
GND : Ground prior

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 137


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / F/I Reset


[OTHER ELEMENT] Range AUTO, MANUAL
Seq’ Coordi’: OFF
L.O Priority: GND Default AUTO Step ~
>F/I Reset: AUTO
Faulted Indicator reset method

AUTO : Reset shall be performed by pressing [FI RESET] button or


shall be performed automatically after High Voltage line becomes
normal.
MANUAL : It shall be reset by pressing [FI RESET] button.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / D/T M-Close


[OTHER ELEMENT] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
L.O Priority: GND
F/I Reset: AUTO Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>D/T M-Close: 0.00

Time delay for manual close

138 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.18. Time Overcurrent Curves


The EVRC2A-N is equipped Standard ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves, ESB curves , user-
defined curves and all 37 non standard recloser curves are available.
A Configuration setting determines whether elements set to use ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves,
ESB curves, user-defined curves reset instantaneously, or corresponding with electromechanical.
The operation times and reset times refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3.

The operation times and reset times are defined as follows :

ANSI/IEEE
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ)

IEC
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1))

ESB
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ)

USER-DEFINED
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ)
Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1-M2))

Table 7-2. Curve Factor


TD Time dial
α, β, γ Characteristic constant
M Multiples of pickup current
Rt Reset characteristic constant

“Recloser clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15㎸ or 27㎸,
otherwise which added 30㎳(±4㎳) are used when it is 38㎸.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 139


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Related Setting Menu

1) USER CURVE 1
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a
[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
>Factor a: 59.5000
Factor b: 2.0000 Default 59.5000 Step 0.0001
Factor r: 1.8000

User defined curve factor α

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b


[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0200 ~ 150.9999
Factor a: 59.5000
>Factor b: 2.0000 Default 2.0000 Step 0.0001
Factor r: 1.8000

User defined curve factor β

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r


[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Factor a: 59.5000
Factor b: 2.0000 Default 1.8000 Step 0.0001
>Factor r: 1.8000

User defined curve factor γ

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt


[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Factor b: 2.0000
Factor r: 1.8000 Default 59.5000 Step 0.0001
>Factor rt: 59.5000

User defined curve factor rt

2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 :
USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above

140 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Standard Curve Coefficients

Table 7-3. ANSI/IEEE


Curves α β γ Rt
Moderately Inverse 0.0107 0.020 0.0231 1.0700
Normally Inverse 5.9500 2.000 0.18 5.9500
Very Inverse 3.985 2.000 0.095 3.985
Extremely Inverse 5.9100 2.000 0.0345 5.9100
Short Time Inverse 3.56e-3 0.02 1.95e-2 0.356
Short Time Very Inverse 1.9925 2.000 0.0475 1.992

Table 7-4. IEC


Curves α β γ Rt
Standard Inverse 0.1400 0.0200 0.0 9.700
Very Inverse 13.500 1.000 0.0 13.500
Extremely Inverse 80.000 2.000 0.0 80.000
Long Time Inverse 135.000 1.000 0.0 135.00
Short Time Inverse 0.0500 0.0400 0.0 0.500

Table 7-5. ESB


Curves α β γ Rt
Standard Inverse 0.011 0.02 0.042 9.000
Very Inverse 3.985 1.95 0.1084 3.985
Long Time Very Inverse 15.94 1.95 0.4336 15.94

Table 7-6. User Defined


Curves α β γ Rt
User1 59.5000 2.0000 1.8000 59.5000
User2 39.8500 2.0000 0.9500 39.8500
User3 59.1000 2.0000 0.3450 59.1000
User4 5.6700 2.0000 0.0352 5.6700

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 141


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 7-7. Definite Time


Curves α β γ Rt
Definite Time 1sec 0.0 - 1.0 1.0
Definite Time 10sec 0.0 - 10.0 10.0

Table 7-8. Non Standard Curves


McGraw-Edison recloser curves
Phase Ground
Old New Old New
A 101 1 102
B 117 2 135
C 133 3 140
D 116 4 106
E 132 5 114
F 163 6 136
H 122 7 152
J 164 8 113
KP 162 8* 111
L 107 9 131
M 118 11 141
N 104 13 142
P 115 14 119
R 105 15 112
T 161 16 139
V 137 17 103
W 138 18 151
Y 120 KG 165
Z 134 - -

142 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

1) ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3
15.00
13.00
2 2
11.00
TIME(SECONDS)

9.00

7.00
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 5.00 0.8
0.7 4.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 3.00 0.5
0.4 0.4
2.00
0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2
1.00

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.05 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
6k

8k

10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-10. ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 143


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ANSI NORMALLY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3
15.00
13.00
2 11.00 2
9.00
TIME(SECONDS)

7.00
1 1
0.9 5.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 4.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
3.00
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
2.00
0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2
1.00

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.50 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-11. ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

144 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ANSI VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

15.00
13.00
1 11.00 1
0.9 9.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 7.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 5.00 0.5
0.4 4.00 0.4

0.3 3.00 0.3

0.2 2.00 0.2

0.1 1.00 0.1


0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.50 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-12. ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 145


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

4) ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
60 60
: ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 15.00 0.6
0.5 13.00 0.5
11.00
0.4 0.4
9.00
0.3 0.3
7.00

0.2 5.00 0.2


4.00

3.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 2.00 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 1.00 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.50 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-13. ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

146 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

5) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
6k
7k
8k
9k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ANSI SHORT TIME INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 15.00 1
0.9 13.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 11.00 0.7
0.6 9.00 0.6
0.5 7.00 0.5
0.4 0.4
5.00
0.3 0.3
4.00

0.2 3.00 0.2

2.00

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 1.00 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.50
0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

3k

4k

5k

10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

2k

6k
7k
8k
9k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-14. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 147


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ANSI SHOTR TIME VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 15.00 0.7
0.6 13.00 0.6
0.5
11.00 0.5
9.00
0.4 0.4
7.00
0.3 0.3
5.00
0.2 4.00 0.2

3.00

0.1 2.00 0.1


0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 1.00 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03
0.50
0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-15. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves

148 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7) IEC Standard Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : IEC STANDARD INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 1 2
TIME(SECONDS)

0.8
0.7
0.6
1 0.5 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.4 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.3 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.2 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.1 0.2

0.1 0.05 0.1


0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-16. IEC Standard Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 149


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

8) IEC Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

500

600
700
800
400

900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : IEC VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
1.00
0.4 0.4
0.8
0.3 0.7 0.3
0.6
0.5
0.2 0.2
0.4

0.3

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.2 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.1
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.05
0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
4k

6k
7k

9k
1k

2k

3k

5k

8k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-17. IEC Very Inverse Curves

150 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

9) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 1. 00 0.08
0.07 0. 8 0.07
0.06 0. 7 0.06
0.05 0. 6 0.05
0.04 0. 5 0.04
0. 4
0.03 0.03
0. 3
0.02 0.02
0. 2
0. 1
0. 05
0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-18. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 151


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

10) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
1. 00
4 4
0. 8
3 0. 7 3
0. 6
0. 5
2 2
0. 4
TIME(SECONDS)

0. 3

1 1
0.9 0. 2 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0. 1
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0. 05
0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-19. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

152 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

11) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

100

300
200

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

8k
9k
2k

4k

5k

6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
1.00
0.3 0.3
0.8
0.7
0.2 0.6 0.2
0.5
0.4

0.1 0.3 0.1


0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.2
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.1
0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02
0.05

0.01 0.01
4k
200

400

500

600
700

1k

2k

3k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

300

800
900

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-20. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 153


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12) ESB Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ESB INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 15.00 3
13.00
2
11.00 2
9.00
TIME(SECONDS)

7.00

1 5.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 4.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 3.00 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 2.00 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 1.00 0.2

0.1 0.50 0.1


0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-21. ESB Inverse Curves

154 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13) ESB Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ESB VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
15.00
TIME(SECONDS)

13.00
11.00
1 9.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 7.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
5.00
0.5 0.5
4.00
0.4 0.4
3.00
0.3 0.3

2.00
0.2 0.2

1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-22. ESB Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 155


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

14) ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ESB LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 15.00 7
6 13.00 6
5 11.00 5
4 9.00 4

3 7.00 3

5.00
2 2
4.00
TIME(SECONDS)

3.00

1 1
0.9 2.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
1.00
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.50
0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-23. ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves

156 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

15) Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)

100

300
200

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

8k
9k
2k

4k

5k

6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : D1, D2 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 D2 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 D1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
4k
200

400

500

600
700

1k

2k

3k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

300

800
900

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-24. Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 157


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

16) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : A, B, C, D, E 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 C 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
B
0.06 D E 0.06
0.05 0.05
A
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-25. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

158 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

17) Non Standard Curves (KP, L, M, N)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
8k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k

9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : KP, L, M, N 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

KP
0.1 0.1
0.09 L 0.09
0.08 M 0.08
0.07 0.07
N
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-26. Non Standard Curves (KP, L, M, N)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 159


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

18) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

8k
9k
2k

4k

5k

6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : P, R, T, V 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
V
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1
T 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 R 0.06
0.05 P 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
2k

4k

5k

6k
7k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900
1k

3k

8k
9k
10k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-27. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

160 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

19) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

100

300
200

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

8k
9k
2k

4k

5k

6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : W, Y, Z 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
Z
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3
W
0.2 0.2
Y

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
4k
200

400

500

600
700

1k

2k

3k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

300

800
900

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-28. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 161


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

20) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

6k
7k
8k
9k
5k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 3 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 2 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

5
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 4 0.07
0.06 1 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-29. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

162 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

21) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

100

200

300

500

600
700
800
400

900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 7 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 9 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2
8

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 8* 0.05
6
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
6k
7k

10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

8k
9k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-30. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 163


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

22) Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 60
: 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 11 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 18 0.6
0.5 0.5
14
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

13
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 17 16 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 15 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-31. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)

164 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

23) Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : F, H, J, KG 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

F J
0.1 KG 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
H
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-32. Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 165


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

8. MONITORING
EVRC2A-N has Monitoring function for following items and also has functions for user to
output Alarm signal or Trip signal.

Ÿ DEMAND
Ÿ SYNCHRO LINE
Ÿ TRIP COUNTER
Ÿ RECLOSER WEAR
Ÿ BATTERY TEST
Ÿ FAULT LOCATOR

8.1. Demand
8.1.1. Description
EVRC2A-N is programmed to monitor following items to be operated as user sets.
Ÿ Phase Current demand value
Ÿ Ground current demand value
Ÿ Negative sequence current demand value

8.1.2. Related Setting Menu


1) Function Setting
Select for system to operate when Demand elements were picked up.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Function
[DEMAND] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Type: THM
OFF : OFF Monitoring
TRIP : Generates Trip signal
TR&AR : Generate Trip and Alarm signal

166 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) Alarm Output Relay Setting


Select Relay output for alarm.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Relays(0-8)
[DEMAND] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Type: THM
Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal.
0000 : No Output Relay is selected.
1234 : Operate output signal through 1, 2, 3, 4 Output Relay.

3) Demand Method Setting


Setting for Demand calculation method.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Type
[DEMAND] Range THM, ROL
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default THM Step ~
>Type: THM
THM : Calculated by Thermal Exponential demand.
ROL : Calculated Rolling demand.

4) Time constant Setting


Setting for 90% Response time in Thermal calculation method.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Time Constant(m)
[DEMAND] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Relays(0-8): OFF
Type: THM Default 5 Step ~
>Time Constant(m): 5
Enter the time required for a steady state current to indicate 90% of the
actual value.

5) Phase demand pickup current setting


Setting for Phase demand pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHA PU(xCT)
[DEMAND] Range 0.04 ~ 3.20
Type: THM
Time Constant(m): 5 Default 0.60 Step 0.01
>PHA PU(xCT): 0.60
Setting value × CT Phase Ratio.
Ex) When CT ratio is 1000:1and setting value is 0.60,
Pickup Current 0.60 × 1000 = 600A

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 167


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

6) Ground demand pickup current Setting


Setting for Ground demand pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / GND PU(xCT)
[DEMAND] Range 0.02 ~ 3.20
Time Constant(m): 5
PHA PU(xCT): 0.60 Default 0.30 Step 0.01
>GND PU(xCT): 0.30
Setting value × CT Ground Ratio
Ex) When CT ratio is 1000:1and setting value is 0.30,
Pickup Current 0.30 × 1000 = 300A

7) Negative sequence demand pickup current Setting


Setting for Negative sequence demand pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / NEQ PU(xCT)
[DEMAND] Range 0.04 ~ 3.20
PHA PU(xCT): 0.60
GND PU(xCT): 0.30 Default 0.60 Step 0.01
>NEQ PU(xCT): 0.60
Setting value × CT Phase Ratio.
Ex) When CT ratio is 1000:1and setting value is 0.60,
Pickup Current 0.60 × 1000 = 600A

168 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2. Synchronism Check (25)


EVRC2A-N provides the manual close for the synchronism check element that synchronism
voltages are within the programmed differentials of voltage magnitude, phase angle position, and
frequency.
If this feature is enabled, the synchronism check will be performed before local/remote close
with the exception of automatic reclose for fault.

When either or both of the synchronism check voltages are de-energized, the synchronism check
can allow for local/remote close.

If EVRC2A-N is the type of CVD, the synchronism check voltage input VL is connected to load
side(VR phase) in recloser. The other synchronizing phase can be connected for phase-neutral
voltage Vr, Vs or Vt; for phase-phase voltages Vab or Vcb. on load side in recloser.

The synchronism check element in the following settings should be enabled.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Function


[SYNCHROCHECK] Range OFF, ALARM
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = ALARM, the feature is operational.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Relays(0-8)


[SYNCHROCHECK] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates an
Alarm.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / D.V.Max(xVT)


[SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 0.50 Step 0.01
>D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
Enter the dead line maximum voltage for synchronism check.
Used to Prevent the synchronism check element for voltage below this
level.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 169


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / L.V.Min(xVT)


[SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25
Relays(0-8): OFF
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50 Default 0.85 Step 0.01
>L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85
Enter the live line minimum voltage for synchronism check.
Used to activate the synchronism check element for voltage over this
level.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.V.D(V)


[SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85 Default 0.10 Step 0.01
>M.V.D(V): 0.10
Enter the maximum voltage difference of the synchronism voltages.
A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.A.D(Deg)


[SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0 ~ 100 deg
L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85
M.V.D(V): 0.10 Default 15 Step 1 deg
>M.A.D(Deg): 15
Enter the maximum angle difference of the synchronism voltages.
An angular differential between the synchronism voltage angles below
this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.F.D(Hz)


[SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.00 ~ 5.00 Hz
M.V.D(V): 0.10
M.A.D(Deg): 15 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 Hz
>M.F.D(Hz): 2.00
Enter the maximum frequency difference of the synchronism voltages.
A frequency differential between the synchronism voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Sync Phase


[SYNCHROCHECK] Range R(AB), S(CB), T(AC)
M.A.D(Deg): 15
M.F.D(Hz): 2.00 Default R(AB) Step ~
>Sync Phase: R(AB)

Select the synchronism check phase on load side.

170 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.3. Trip Counter


8.3.1. Trip Counter Explanation
EVRC2A-N records counter related with System operation. Especially Trip Counter is operated
depending on Monitoring function set by user.
Ÿ Trip : Records trip operation count
Ÿ Fault : Records Fault count
Ÿ System Restart : Records system restart count
Ÿ
MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / COUNTERS
[ COUNTER ]
1.TRIP : 00000
2.FAULT : 00000 User can confirm in “MAIN MENU/MAINTENANCE/COUNTERS”
3.RESTART: 00011

8.3.2. Related Setting Menu


1) Function Setting
Select for system to operate when Trip Counter reaches Limit value set by user.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Function
[TRIP COUNTER] Range OFF, ALARM
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Limit: 10000
OFF : OFF Monitoring
TRIP : Generates Trip signal
TR&AR : Generate Trip and Alarm signal

2) Alarm Output Relay Setting


Select Relay output for alarm.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Relays(0-8)
[TRIP COUNTER] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Limit: 10000
Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal.
0000(off) : No Output Relay is selected.
1234 : Operate output signal through 1, 2, 3, 4 Output Relay.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 171


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) Limit value Setting


Setting for Trip Counter Monitor value.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Limit
[TRIP COUNTER] Range 1 ~ 20000
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 10000 Step 1
>Limit: 10000
Select for system to operate when Trip Counter limit value was picked
up.

4) Clear value Setting


Use to synchronize EVRC2A-N counter with Recloser Counter.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Counter set
[TRIP COUNTER] Range 0 ~ 10000
Relays(0-8): OFF
Limit: 10000 Default 0 Step 1
>Counter set: 0

Enters a value for Trip Counter Clear.

5) Stored Value Clear


Select “7.Counter” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA”
to clear the Trip Counter.

172 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.4. Recloser Wear


8.4.1. Recloser Wear Explanation
Maintenance of contact life of Recloser. Manages the contact life calculated from fault current
size when faults interrupted. The initial value is 100%
MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR
[WEAR MONITOR (%)] User can confirm in
1.CONTACT A : 98.70
2.CONTACT B : 98.70 “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR”
3.CONTACT C : 98.70
Phase A Wear : Shows phase A contact life.
Phase B Wear : Shows phase B contact life.
Phase C Wear : Shows phase C contact life.

8.4.2. Related setting menu


1) Function Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Function
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range OFF, ALARM
>Function: ALARM
Pickup(%): 20.0 Default ALARM Step ~
Rated Volt(kV): 15
Select for system to operate when Recloser wear elements were picked
up.

2) Pickup Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Pickup(%)
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 0.0 ~ 50.0 %
Function: ALARM
>Pickup(%): 20.0 Default 20.0 Step 0.1 %
Rated Volt(kV): 15

Enter Pickup value of contact life.

3) Rated Voltage Setting


PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Rated Volt(kV)
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 15, 27, 38 ㎸
Function: ALARM
Pickup(%): 20.0 Default Note Step ~
>Rated Volt(kV): 15
Select rated voltage.

NOTE : The rated voltage determines the Recloser type.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 173


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

4) Interrupter capacity setting


PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Interrupt(kA)
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 5.0 ~ 50.0 kA
Pickup(%): 20.0
Rated Volt(kV): 15 Default 12.5 Step 0.1 kA
>Interrupt(kA): 12.5

Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.

5) Maximum Rated Interruption Number Setting


PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / No. Max I
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 1 ~ 999
Rated Volt(kV): 15
Interrupt(kA): 12.5 Default 100 Step 1
>No. Max I: 100

Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.

6) Clear value Setting


Use to synchronize EVRC2A-N contact wear with Recloser contact wear.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / A Wear Set
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %
>A Wear Set: 100.0
>B Wear Set: 100.0 Default 100.00 Step 0.01 %
>C Wear Set: 100.0

Enter a value of Phase A ’s contact wear.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / B Wear Set


[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %
>A Wear Set: 100.0
>B Wear Set: 100.0 Default 100.00 Step 0.01 %
>C Wear Set: 100.0

Enter a value of Phase B ’s contact wear.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / C Wear Set


[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %
>A Wear Set: 100.0
>B Wear Set: 100.0 Default 100.00 Step 0.01 %
>C Wear Set: 100.0

Enter a value of Phase C ’s contact wear.

174 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

7) Stored value Clear


Select “8. WEAR MONITOR” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR
SAVED DATA” to clear value. Insert the value set in “PRIMARY SETTING /
MONITORING / RECLOSER WEAR / A, B, C Wear” from LCD menu.

8.5. Battery Test


PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / BATTERY TEST / BT Time(day)
[BATTERY TEST] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 7 day
>BT Time(day): OFF
Default OFF Step 1 day

Select the period for automatically checking the battery status.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 175


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.6. Fault Locator


The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the
phase of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type(phase to ground, (phase to phase to
ground), phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and
fault distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance.
This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence
impedance are a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance.
In calculating, errors could be introduced by several reasons(fault resistance etc.), the major error
due to fault resistance can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault
current and voltage.
For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault
data is required at least 2 cycles.
If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily
achieved, but source impedance is not required.
Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power
flow.
In case of closing, during a reclose sequence, the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful.
The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder.

Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 8-1. Faulted


distribution system circuit” for example.

mZ (1-m)Z

IA
IF L
O
VA A
RF
D

Figure 8-1. Faulted distribution system circuit

176 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

The fault locator settings are as follows :


PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Function
[FAULT LOCATOR] Range OFF, ON
>Function : OFF
Length(km) : 50.0 Default OFF Step ~
Z1(RES) : 10.0
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = ON, the feature is operational.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Feeder Length


[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 ~ 99.9 km
Function : OFF
>Length(km) : 50.0 Default 50.0 Step 0.1 km
Z1(RES) : 10.0

Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z1-Resistive


[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 ~ 6000.0
Function : OFF
Length(km) : 50.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
>Z1(RES) : 10.0
Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence
impedance, in actual ohms.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z1-Inductive


[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 ~ 6000.0
Length(km) : 50
Z1(RES) : 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
>Z1(IND) : 10.0
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence
impedance, in actual ohms.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z0-Resistive


[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 ~ 6000.0
Z1(RES) : 10.0
Z1(IND) : 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
>Z0(RES) : 10.0
Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance,
in actual ohms.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z0-Inductive


[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 ~ 6000.0
Z1(IND) : 10.0
Z0(RES) : 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
>Z0(IND) : 10.0
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence
impedance, in actual ohms.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 177


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

9. STATUS
This menu shows the current status of EVRC2A-N like below
Ÿ OPTO INPUTS
Ÿ RELAY OUTPUTS
Ÿ CLOCK
Ÿ CONTROL TYPE

9.1. OPTO Inputs


Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OPTO INPUTS” to see external input port status..
STATUS / OPTO INPUTS
[OPTO INPUTS] Display 8 input port statuses. They are indicated as “OPEN” or
Input 1: OPEN
Input 2: CLOSE “CLOSE” depending on the input signal status.
Input 3: OPEN
Input 4: OPEN OPEN : Shows External Input is de-asserted,
Input 5: OPEN
Input 6: OPEN CLOSE : Shows External Input is asserted.
Input 7: OPEN
Input 8: CLOSE
Use [▲] [▼] button to see all input port statuses

9.2. Relay Outputs


Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / RELAY OUTPUTS” to see external output port status.
STATUS / OPTO INPUTS
[RELAY OUTPUTS] Display 8 output port statuses. They are indicated as “OPEN” or
Output 1: OPEN
Output 2: CLOSE “CLOSE” depending on the output signal status.
Output 3: OPEN
Output 4: OPEN OPEN : Shows External Output is de-asserted,
Output 5: OPEN
Output 6: OPEN CLOSE : Shows External Output is asserted.
Output 7: OPEN
Output 8: CLOSE
Use [▲] [▼] button to see all output port statuses

178 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.3. Clock
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / CLOCK” to see current time.
STATUS / CLOCK
Check current time
[CURRENT TIME]

2009/11/05 21:02:38

9.4. Control Type


Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / CONTROL TYPE” to see EVRC2A-N information.
STATUS / CONTROL TYPE
The current information about EVRC2A-N is shown.
[CONTROL TYPE]
EVRC2A-M2-240R156-
412BLLHP-XXN13XGXX
03-1705-1000-CO-5030

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 179


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

10. METERING
The following values are contained in the metering elements of EVRC2A-N.
Ÿ Current
Ÿ Voltage
Ÿ Frequency
Ÿ Synchronism Voltage
Ÿ Power
Ÿ Energy
Ÿ Demand
Ÿ System.

10.1. Metering Elements


10.1.1. Current
The following values are contained in the current metering.
IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
IG : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
ISG : Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
I2 : Displays the calculated negative sequence RMS current (A)

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT”


MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT

[LINE CURRENT(A)] [PHASE A CURRENT] [PHASE C CURRENT]


A: 0 B: 0 0 A 0.0 Lag 0 A 0.0 Lag
C: 0 G: 0 [PHASE B CURRENT] [GROUND CURRENT]
SG: 0 I2: 0 0 A 0.0 Lag 0 A 0.0 Lag

[SENSTV CURRENT]
0 A 0.0 Lag

Display measured values of current and current phase per phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check
metering information of current.

180 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.2. Voltage
The following values are contained in the voltage metering.
A-N : Displays the measured A-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, deg°)
B-N : Displays the measured B-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, deg°)
C-N : Displays the measured C-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, deg°)
A-B : Displays the measured A-B RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, deg°)
B-C : Displays the measured B-C RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, deg°)
C-A : Displays the measured C-A RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, deg°)
AVERAGE PHASE : Displays the calculated average of the RMS phase voltage(㎸)
AVERAGE LINE : Displays the calculated average of the RMS line voltage(㎸)
POS SEQ : Displays the calculated positive sequence RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, deg°)
NEG SEQ : Displays the calculated negative sequence RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, deg°)
ZERO SEQ : Displays the calculated zero sequence RMS voltage and phasor (kV, deg°)

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE”


MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE

[VOLTAGE (kV)] [AVERAGE PHASE] [PHASE A-N VOLTAGE]


AN: 0.00 AB: 0.00 VOLTAGE --> 0.00 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
BN: 0.00 BC: 0.00 [AVERAGE LINE] [PHASE B-N VOLTAGE]
CN: 0.00 CA: 0.00 VOLTAGE --> 0.00 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag

[PHASE C-N VOLTAGE]


0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[LINE A-B VOLTAGE]
0.00 kV 0.0 Lag

[ZERO SEQ VOLTAGE] [POS SEQ VOLTAGE] [LINE B-C VOLTAGE]


0.00 kV 0.0 Lag 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[NEG SEQ VOLTAGE] [LINE C-A VOLTAGE]
0.00 kV 0.0 Lag 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag

Display measured values of voltage and voltage phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering
information of voltage.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 181


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.3. Frequency
The following values are contained in the frequency metering.
Ÿ Frequency(㎐)
Ÿ Frequency decay rate(㎐/Sec)

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY”


MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY
[ FREQUENCY (Hz)]
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz/Sec Frequency Display

10.1.4. Synchro Voltage


The following values are contained in the synchronism voltage metering.
Ÿ Synchro Voltage(㎸)
Ÿ Synchro Phasor(deg°)
Ÿ Synchro Frequency(㎐)
Ÿ Synchrocheck delta(Phasor, voltage, frequency)

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / SYNCHRO VOLTAGE”


MAIN MENU / METERING / SYNCHRO VOLTAGE
[SYNCHRO VOLTAGE] Display measured values of Synchronism Voltage, Frequency and
0.00 kV 0.0 Leg
[SYNCHRO FREQUENCY] Synchronism Delta. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering information
0.00 Hz
of Synchronism voltage.

[SYNCHRO DELTA]
0.0 Leg
0.00 kV
0.00 Hz

182 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.5. Power
The following values are contained in the power metering.
Ÿ Real power(MW)
Ÿ Reactive power(Mvar)
Ÿ Apparent power(MVA)
Ÿ Power factor(%)

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER”


MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER

[REAL POWER (MW)] [REACTIVE POW(MVAR)] [APPARENT POW(MWA)]


Pa: 0.00 Pa: 0.00 Pa: 0.00
Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00 Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00 Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00
Pc: 0.00 Pc: 0.00 Pc: 0.00

[POWER FACTOR]
Pa: 0.0
Pb: 0.0 P3: 0.0
Pc: 0.0

Display measured values of power and power factor per phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check
metering information of power.

10.1.6. Energy
The following values are contained in the energy metering.
Ÿ Positive watthour(MWh) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
Ÿ Negative watthour(MWh) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
Ÿ Positive varhour(Mvar) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
Ÿ negative varhour(Mvar) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)

The updated rate of the energy meters is based on the “Time Constant” setting “MAIN MENU /
SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND” The meters will update every 1/15 of the Demand
Constant. For example : if the Demand Constant is set to 15 minutes, the energy meters will
update every 1 minute (15min × 1/15 = 1 min)
The watt-hour and VAR-hour meters can be reset to 0 through “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY
SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA / ENERGY”. The “SD(start date)” on LCD indicates the
time when the watt-hour and VAR-hour meters are reset.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 183


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY”


MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY

[POSITIVE W/H(MWh)] [POSITIVE V/H(MVar)] [NEGATIVE W/H(MWh)]


Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0
Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0
SD:09/12/31 00:00:00 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00

[NEGATIVE V/H(MVar)]
Pa: 0 Pb: 0
Pa: 0 Pb: 0
SD:09/12/31 00:00:00

Display energy. Use [▲] [▼] button to check energy information.

10.1.7. Demand
The following values are contained in the demand metering.
Actual demand & maximum demand with Value (Current, Real power, Reactive power) and Date
(Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)

During each demand value, the EVRC2A-N also captures and stores maximum values for the
measurements listed below. It functions as a standard maximum meter. When a new maximum
value is determined, the old value is replaced. A time stamp in the following format (Date:
Year/Month/Day and Time: Hour:Minute,Second), is placed with the latest maximum values.

The Max demand meters can be reset to 0 through “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP /
CLEAR SAVED DATA / MAX DEMAND”

184 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / DEMEND”


MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND

[DEMAND CURRENT (A)] [PHASE A CURRENT] [PHASE B CURRENT]


A: 0 B: 0 DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A
C: 0 G: 0 MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A
SG: 0 I2: 0 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00

[PHASE SG CURRENT] [PHASE G CURRENT] [PHASE C CURRENT]


DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A
MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A
10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00

[PHASE I2 CURRENT] [PHASE A REAL POWER] [PHASE B REAL POWER]


DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0.00 MW DEMAND: 0.00 MW
MAX : 0 A MAX : 0.00 MW MAX : 0.00 MW
10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00

[P-A REACTIVE POWER] [3P REAL POWER (MW)] [PHASE C REAL POWER]
DEMAND: 0.00 MWar DEMAND: 0.00 MW DEMAND: 0.00 MW
MAX : 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MW MAX : 0.00 MW
10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00

[P-B REACTIVE POWER] [P-C REACTIVE POWER] [3P REACTIVE POWER]


DEMAND: 0.00 MWar DEMAND: 0.00 MWar DEMAND: 0.00 MWar
MAX : 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MWar
10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00

Demand Current, Real power and Reactive power Display.


Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 185


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.8. System
The following values are contained in the system metering.
Ÿ Board power(±12, +5V)
Ÿ Temperature(℃)
Ÿ Battery voltage(V)
Ÿ Gas pressure(Bar)
※. NOTE ) According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure
measurement.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / SYSTEM”


MAIN MENU / METERING / SYSTEM
[ SYSTEM METER] System metering display.
+12:11.85 –12:-11.94
+5 : 4.99 TMP:27.58
BAT:26.04 GAS: 0.50

186 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.2. Accuracy
The harmonic components of current and voltage are removed from input voltage and current
parameters, so all measurements based on these quantities respond to the fundamental
component only.

Table 10-1. Metering Accuracy


Accuracy
Measurements Parameters Unit Range
CVD VT

Phase A RMS Current

Phase B RMS Current


CURRENT A ±1% of 2 x CT ±1% of 2 x CT 20 x CT
Phase C RMS Current
Phase G RMS Current

A–N (A–B) RMS Voltage

VOLTAGE B–N (B–C) RMS Voltage ㎸ ±2.5% ±1% -


C–N (C–A) RMS Voltage

SYMMETRICAL I1, I2, 3I0 A ±1% of 2 x CT ±1% of 2 x CT


-
COMPONENTS V1, V2, 3V0 ㎸ ±2.5% ±1%

POWER Phase A, B, C
Rate ±0.05 ±0.02 -1.00 to 1.00
FACTOR 3Φ Phase

Phase A, B, C
3ΦREAL POWER MW ±3% ±2% –320.00 to 320.00
3Φ Phase

3ΦREACTIVE Phase A, B, C
Mvar ±3% ±2% –320.00 to 320.00
POWER 3Φ Phase

3ΦAPPARENT Phase A, B, C
MVA ±3% ±2% –320.00 to 320.00
POWER 3Φ Phase

Phase A, B, C
WATT-HOURS MW/h ±5% ±3% –32000 to 32000
3Φ Phase

Phase A/B/C/G Current A ±2% ±2%

A/B/C, 3Φ Real Power MW ±5% ±3%


DEMAND -
A/B/C, 3Φ Reactive Power Mvar ±5% ±3%

A/B/C, 3Φ Apparent Power MVA ±5% ±3%

A-N (A-B) Source


FREQUENCY ㎐ ±0.05 ±0.02 40.00 to 65.00
Load Voltage

If the VT connection type is set to delta, all single phase voltage quantities are displayed as zero.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 187


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

11. MAINTENANCE
EVRC2A-N has maintenance function for following items.
Ÿ COUNTERS
Ÿ WEAR MONITOR
Ÿ OUTPUT RELAY TEST

11.1. Counters
EVRC2A-N records counter related with system operation. The recorded counter items are below.
In order to check counter information, go to “MAINTENANCE / COUNTERS”. For more detail
information, refer to “8.3.1. Trip Counter Explanation”.
Ÿ Trip
Ÿ Fault
Ÿ System Restart

11.2. Wear Monitor


EVRC2A-N displays the each phase’s contact wear of the recloser. In order to check information
of the recloser’s contact wear, go to “MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR”, For more detail
information, refer to “8.4.1. Recloser Wear Explanation”.

188 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

11.3. Output Relay Test


EVRC2A is capable to perform the output test of the relay output ports(1~8). For the output test,
go to “MAINTENANCE / OUTPUT RELAY TEST” menu.
MAINTENANCE / OUTPUT RELAY TEST
① Select output signal at ① for testing.
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST] Press [ENT] button and then ② is shown.
SELECT RELAY :RLY 1

Press [FUN] button at ② and then ③ is shown. The output signal has
② been “asserted” for 2 sec. If the test is completed, the message,
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST] “END TESTING”, is shown and then back to the previous menu.
SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Press <FUN> : Start
Press <ESC> : Cancel
If the [ESC] button is press at ②, ④ is shown and the output test is
③ canceled.
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST]
SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Press <FUN> : Start
TESTING


[OUTPUT RELAY TEST]
SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Press <FUN> : Start
TEST Canceled

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 189


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12. EVENT RECORDER


EVRC2A-N has recording function for following items.
Ÿ FAULT CYCLE WAVEFORM CAPTURE
Ÿ SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER
Ÿ LOAD PROFILE
Ÿ DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER
Ÿ FAULT TRIP

12.1. Waveform Capture


In case of Fault, Waveform Capture records 16 Data of 15-Cycle with 16-Smple per 1 Cycle
resolution.
Fault cycle summary is displayed on LCD screen
Captured fault waveforms can be showed by the interface software.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT CYCLE” to see Fault cycle summary.
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT CYCLE
[NO-①] ② ① Fault No: There are 16 events are recorded and the latest event is
IA: ③ IB: ③
IC: ③ IG: ③ displayed in advance.
④10/01/01 19:51:58

② Fault Type
- Fault Pickup
Ex> - 27: Under Voltage Trip
[NO-01] Fault Pickup - 59: Over Voltage Trip
IA: 0 IB: 549
IC: 0 IG: 548 - 25: Synchronism Check Trip
10/01/01 19:51:58
- 81: Under Frequency Trip
- A, B, C, G: Fault phase showes LED ON.
- S: Sensitive Earth Fault

③ Each phase fault current unit : Ampere(A)

④ Event occurred time


: Year/Month/Day(or Month/Day/Year) Hour: Minute: Second

190 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.1.1. Trigger Source


Ÿ Occurred Protection element pickup
Ÿ Occurred Fault trip command active
Depending on pickup size, if interval between pickup and trip is within 15 cycles including
prefault cycles(4 cycles), then record pickup cycles. But if the interval between pickup and trip
are not within 15 cycles, then record pickup cycles and trip cycles. These operations are very
useful to examine.

12.1.2. Data Channels


Stores following data :
Ÿ 4 currents : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig
Ÿ 3 voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) : not passed digital-filter
Ÿ Frequency
Ÿ 32 logic input states
Ÿ 8Ch output relays
Ÿ 8Ch Input

12.1.3. Sample Rate


Captures one period of 16 sampling per 1cycle.

12.1.4. Storage capacity


The capacity of storage is last 16 events of 15cycles.

12.1.5. Related Setting Menu


1) ON/OFF Setting
Fault Cycle waveform capture function can be set ON/OFF by user.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ Fault Cycle
[EVENT RECORDER] Range OFF, ON
>Fault Cycle: ON
Len' of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~
Load Profile: ON
ON : Record fault cycle waveform.
OFF : No record of fault cycle waveform.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 191


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) Pre-fault length Setting


User sets the length of pre-fault before Trigger.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ Len' of Pre F
[EVENT RECORDER] Range 0 ~ 14
Fault Cycle: ON
>Len' of Pre F: 4 Default 4 Step 1
Load Profile: ON

Usually sets 4 cycles as default.

3) Stored Value Clear


Select “1. FAULT CYCLE” in “PRIMARY SETTING / REALY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED
DATA” to clear the stored value.

12.1.6. Interface software


Interface software shows Data and captured waveform (below)

Figure 12-1. Data and captured waveform showed by Interface Software

192 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.2. System Event Recorder


Record changes of system status up to 500 lists when trigger source asserted and deasserted.
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / SYSTEM STATUS
[NO-001] CONTR LOCK Confirm in
STATUS : LO/DEASSERT
DATE : 10/01/22 ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / SYSTEM STATUS”
TIME : 19:51:58:387

12.2.1. Trigger Source


Ÿ Protection Element
Ÿ 52A Contact
Ÿ Sequence status
Ÿ Front panel control
Ÿ AC supply
Ÿ External control
Ÿ Fail operation
Ÿ External input status
Ÿ System alarm

NOTE : For more details about Trigger Source, refer to “Appendix C”.

12.2.2. Trigger Time


Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.

12.2.3. Trigger type


Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

12.2.4. Storage Capacity


Stores last 500 events.

12.2.5. Related Setting Menu


System automatically maintains system event recorder. User can clear only stored events.
1) Stored Value Clear
Select “2.SYSTEM STATUS” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR
SAVED DATA” to clear.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 193


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.2.6. Interface software


Interface software shows system status events.

Figure 12-2. System Status Events showed by Interface Software

194 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.3. Load Profile


Record the Demand value when reaches in setting time (5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60minute). Load
profile has 1024 Banks that can store values of 42 days if setting time is 60minute.
LOAD PROFILE

CURRENT (A) [0001] Confirm in
A: 0 B: 0
C: 0 G: 0 ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / LOAD PROFILE”
10/01/22 21:45:00
Ÿ To see previous value, press [▲] key.
② Ÿ To see next value, press [▼] key.
REAL POW(MW) [0001] Ÿ On screen ①, use [◀] or [▶] key to see ①, ②, ③ screen in tern.
A: 0 B: 0
C: 0 G: 0
10/01/22 21:45:00


REAC POW(Mvar)[0001]
A: 0 B: 0
C: 0 G: 0
10/01/22 21:45:00

12.3.1. Trigger Source


Ÿ Demand Current(A, B, C, G)
Ÿ Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
Ÿ Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3ф)

12.3.2. Trigger Time


Ÿ 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 Minute

12.3.3. Storage Capacity


Ÿ Stores 1024 events

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 195


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.3.4. Related Setting Menu


1) ON/OFF Setting
Load Profile can be set ON/OFF by user.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Load Profile
[EVENT RECORDER] Range OFF, ON
Fault Cycle: ON
Len' of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~
>Load Profile: ON
ON : Records load profile.
OFF : No record of load profile.

2) Recording time interval setting


PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / L.P save time(m)
[EVENT RECORDER] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Len' of Pre F: 4
Load Profile: ON Default 15 Step ~
>L.P save time(m):15

Sets the interval time between Records.

12.3.5. Stored value Clear


Select “LOAD PROFILE” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED
DATA” to clear.

196 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.3.6. Interface software


Interface software shows load profile data.

Figure 12-3. Load Profile Data showed by Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 197


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.4. Diagnostic Event Recorder


Record diagnostic events up to 100 lists when trigger source asserted and deasserted.
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / DIAGNOSTIC
[NO-001] SLEEP MODE Confirm in
STATUS : LO/DEASSERT
DATE : 10/01/22 ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / DIAGNOSTIC”
TIME : 19:51:58:387

12.4.1. Trigger Source


Ÿ SYSTEM POWER : AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V
Ÿ A/D Conversion : A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2
Ÿ SLEEP MODE
Ÿ POWER DOWN MODE
Ÿ SETTING CHANGE
Ÿ GAS STATUS
※. NOTE ) According to a recloser type, there may be no diagnosis of gas
pressure status.

For more details about Trigger Source, refer to “Appendix D”

12.4.2. Trigger Time


Monitors status of Trigger source in every 1/4 cycle

12.4.3. Trigger type


Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

12.4.4. Storage Capacity


Stores last 100 events.

12.4.5. Related Setting Menu


System automatically maintains Diagnostic event recorder. User can clear only stored events.
1) Stored Value Clear
Select “4.DIAGNOSTIC” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED
DATA” to clear.

198 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.4.6. Interface software


Interface software shows Diagnostic events.

Figure 12-4. Diagnostic Events showed by Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 199


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.5. Fault Trip Event Recorder - Optoin


When fault trip occurs, fault time and fault current of each phase are recorded.
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT TRIP
[01/1] ABCG Confirm in
IA: 0 IB: 0
IC: 0 IG: 0 ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT TRIP”
10/01/01 00:00:00

[①/②] ③ ① Display the order of the fault trip occurrence and events
IA: ④ IB: ④
IC: ④ IG: ④ from the most recent fault to the oldest fault.
⑤10/01/01 00:00:00
Total 50 events can be stored.
② Display fault sequence(shot counter).
③ Display fault phase.
④ Display current of each phase when fault occurs.
⑤ Display fault time.

12.5.1. Trigger Source


Ÿ Target elements
- A: A phase
- B: B phase
- C: C phase
- G: G phase
Ÿ fault current[A]: A , B, C and G phase currents

12.5.2. Trigger Time


Monitors status of Trigger source in every 1/4 cycle

12.5.3. Storage Capacity


Stores last 50 events.

200 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.5.4. Interface software


Interface software shows Fault Trip events.

Figure 12-5. Fault Trip Events showed by Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 201


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13. INSTALLATION
13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch

Figure 13-1. User Interface Door and Power Switch

User Interface Door


User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom).To open the door, pull
the handle.
Control Power Switch
After opening the User Interface Door, you see 2 Switches. Left side switch is for Battery Power,
right side one is for AC Power. Turning on either one of two activates control.
AC Power Outlet
For user convenience, AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Fuse is installed for
safety from overload. Location of fuse is referred to “Figure 13-5. Inner Structure”

202 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.2. Vent and Outer Cover

Figure 13-2. Air Vent and Outer Cover

Outer Cover
It is for blocking the direct ray of light to delay raising temperature inside of Control Cubicle.
The gap between control cubicle and cover is 10mm.

Air Vent
To protect control part from humidity by temperature fluctuation, Vents are on left and right side
covered with Outer Cover.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 203


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan

Figure 13-3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan

Ÿ EVRC2A-N has Small size and Large size depending on Recloser Type.
Ÿ Small size is available for EVR1, EVR2, Large size is available for EVR3.
Ÿ Large size is able to make “User available Space” larger, the space unit is referred to
“Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions”

204 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Ÿ Standard for EVR1, EVR2 is small size and for EVR3 is large size.
Ÿ EVR1 (Recloser Rated Voltage : 15.5㎸) / EVR2 (27㎸) / EVR3 (38㎸)
Ÿ For installation on a Pole, the lifting hole is indicated.
Ÿ Weight of EVRC2A-N small size is 85㎏ and large size is 90㎏.
Ÿ EVRC2A-N should be fixed top and bottom with 16㎜(5/8") Bolt.
Ÿ There is an Exit hole for external cable that can be connected to additional functioning
hardware.
Ÿ The diameter of the hole is 22㎜(0.866") and two of Standard Receptacle "MS22" Series
can be extended.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 205


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram

Figure 13-4. Earth Wiring Diagram

Ÿ After installation of Control cubicle, connect the ground.


Ÿ Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12㎜(0.470") diameter.
Ÿ Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from EVRC2A-N Earth Terminal must be connected to
the ground.

206 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.5. Inner Structure

Figure 13-5. Inner Structure

Controller Power NFB (No Fuse Breaker)


Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac.
Heater
Optional Heater is 40W
Battery
Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Use (+) screwdriver for replacement.
Fuse
TF1, TF2, TF3 are for circuit protection, refers to (see “13.21. Fuse”)
Terminal Block
Place for AC Power line, there are two ports for user.
User Available Space
Space for additional hardware connection. Installation and space size refers to “Figure 13-6.
Mount Accessories Dimensions”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 207


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions

Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions

Ÿ Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space.
Ÿ On Base plate, 10㎜/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate.
Ÿ Available space for height of base plate is from 101.6㎜ (4”) to 177.8㎜ (7”)

208 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.7. User-Available DC Power


Table 13-1. User-Available DC Power
Voltage Rating Voltage Range Maximum Power output Positions
24Vdc 20∼25Vdc 30W Continuous Side Panel CN5
15Vdc 14.0∼15.5Vdc 70W 10second (1-VCC/+)
12Vdc 11.0∼12.5Vdc Short 1second (2-AGND/-)
Standard Voltage : 12Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating

Ÿ 30W DC Power is provided. In case of the necessity of larger than 30W, additional power
should be attached. For more details, contact manufacturer. Input of the additional power is
referred to “Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses”
Ÿ Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.315"). With using (+) CN5
connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to 12.
Ÿ To change Voltage ratings, disconnect Jumper Pin in JP3 “Figure 13-31. ANALOG
BOARD”, and connect Jumper Pin to either JPI (24Vdc) or JP2 (15Vdc). Be sure of the
voltage rating due to disassembly.
Ÿ When overload, automatically circuit breaks current. In case long-term overload time, there
is a fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 209


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses

Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses

Ÿ Caution for an electric shock due to AC Power loaded in Terminal block.


Ÿ Standard AC Power is 220Vac.
Ÿ AC Power input terminal 1, 2 are connected from Receptacle to Terminal block. Terminal 3
is the ground.
Ÿ Terminal 4, 5 are for connecting additional AC Power. Terminal 4 is connected with TF3 for
protection, terminal 5 is in series with AC Power
Ÿ On TF3 Fuse, AC Power Outlet is connected with 40W Heater. Reference for branching.
Ÿ In AC line connection, blue wired line is for Neutral, white wired line is for Phase wire,
green wired line is for the ground.
Ÿ Terminal 6, 7, 8 are spare for Recloser 52 contact.
Ÿ Terminal 9, 10 are for User Available Terminal block. In need of more terminals, use User
Available Space.

52 Contact Auxiliary Specs


Rating (Resistive load) : 30Vdc 5A / 125Vdc 0.6A / 250Vdc 0.3A

210 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.9. EVRC2A-N Wiring Diagram - CVD Type

Figure 13-8. EVRC2A-N Wiring Diagram - CVD Type

Ÿ Wiring diagram of EVRC2A-N standard.


Ÿ CN1 has different system wirings depending on User system. In “Figure 13-8. EVRC2A-N
Wiring Diagram - CVD Type”, CN1 is marked as Earthing System. For non-Earthing system,
refer to “Figure 13-11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram”
Ÿ CN2 is Voltage Input Connector. “Figure 13-8. EVRC2A-N Wiring Diagram - CVD Type”
is CVD (Capacitor Voltage Divider) type and “Figure 13-9. EVRC2A-N Wiring Diagram -
VT Type” is VT type.
Ÿ VT type is standard and CVD type is for optional. CVD type and VT type are not
exchangeable.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 211


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.10. EVRC2A-N Wiring Diagram - VT Type

Figure 13-9. EVRC2A-N Wiring Diagram - VT Type

Ÿ “Figure 13-9. EVRC2A-N Wiring Diagram - VT Type” is wiring diagram of VT type of


which Voltage Input is optional.
Ÿ CN2 is Voltage Input Connector. For wiring, refer to “Figure 13-13. VT Wiring Diagram”
Ÿ CVD type and VT type are not exchangeable. VT type is standard and CVD type is optional.

212 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.11. Side Panel


Current Inputs
IA,IB,IC,IN,SEF
CN2 Voltage Inputs
VA,VB,VC,VL
CN3 AC24V IN
Relay Module AC Power Input
CN4 BATT` IN
Relay Module DC Power Input
CN5 POWER OUT - Option
User-Available DC Voltage Source
CN6 CONTROL
Recloser Open, Close
CN7 UPS
Monitors and controls Close and Trip Power
CN8 RECLOSER STATUS
Open, Close, Lock, Pressure
CN9 CN10 OUTPUTS and INPUTS - Option
OUT1~OUT5(A Contact), OUT6~OUT7(B Contact)
OUT8(ALARM)
IN01~IN08
PORT2 - Option
SERIAL RS232
PORT3 - Option
SERIAL RS485/422
PORT4 - Option
ETHERNET

NOTE :
1) I/O Terminal (CN10, CN9) has functions to
control basic operation of Recloser and can be
connected with SCADA System for use.
2) Remove the coating of cable length of 8㎜
(0.315"). Side panel connector for user should be Figure 13-10. Side Panel
connected to Wire size AWG24 to 12

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 213


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram


Current IG is connected with Side Panel
IG(A07,A08) in Earthing System.
SEF(A09,A10) should be connected, so
called “JUMPER”

IG Input Current Range


Ÿ 0.5A Nominal
Ÿ 2A continuous
Ÿ 25A 1 second
Ÿ Burden : 0.19VA(0.5A)

Current IG should be connected with


SEF(A09,A10) of Side Panel in.
Non Earthing System.
IG(A07,A08) should be connected to each
other.

SEF Input Current Range


Ÿ 0.05A Nominal
Ÿ 0.16A Continuous
Ÿ 0.6A 1 second
Ÿ Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A) Figure 13-11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram

Recloser Phase should match with User system. Refer to “Figure 13-15. Phase Rotation”

CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.

214 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.13. CVD Wiring Diagram

Figure 13-12. CVD Wiring Diagram

Ÿ CVD (Capacitor Voltage Divider) measures Voltage with using Capacitor installed in each
Bushing of Recloser.
Ÿ CVD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable.
Ÿ Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. If CT Inputs changed Phase
rotation, Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged.
Ÿ Option CVD 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸ Class
Ÿ Load Side CVD of EPR model is optional.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 215


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.14. VT Wiring Diagram

Figure 13-13. VT Wiring Diagram

Ÿ CVD Type can not be used when VT(Voltage Transformer) Type was selected.
Ÿ VT wiring should match Current Inputs.
Ÿ For Load Side VT wiring, refer to “Figure 13-14. VL Wiring Diagram”
Ÿ Voltage Inputs VA, VB, VC and VL Load side
n Input Voltage Range : Vphase-Vcom Continuous < 300V
n Burden : 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)

216 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.15. Load Side VT Wiring Diagram

Figure 13-14. VL Wiring Diagram

Ÿ Load Side VT check synchronism for Phase.


Ÿ Phase B should be connected to VL2(Vcom) in Non Earthing System.
Ÿ Voltage Input Range : VL1-VL2 Continuous < 300V
n Burden : 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 217


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.16. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation

Figure 13-15. Phase Rotation

Ÿ For Metering accuracy, phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same.
Ÿ “Figure 13-15. Phase Rotation” shows the same phase rotation between User System and
Recloser.
Ÿ If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser, correct CT and CVD
wiring in side panel to be matched.
Ÿ EVR Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side.

218 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.17. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions


Table 13-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin Function Pin Function
A C.T Phase C a 52 common(Auxiliary)
B C.T Phase B b 52b(Auxiliary)
C C.T Phase A c 52a(Auxiliary)
D C.T Common(G) d Close and Trip Coil Common
E CVD Source Phase C e Close and Trip Coil Common
F CVD Source Phase B f Close and Trip Coil Common
G CVD Source Phase A g Close Coil
H Ground(CVD Load side Phase T) h Close Coil
J Ground(CVD Load side Phase S) j Close Coil
K CVD Load side Phase R k not connected
L Pressure Sensor Output(controller input) m Trip Coil
M not connected n not connected
N Pressure Sensor Power AGND p Trip Coil
P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc r Trip Coil
R Cable shield and Ground s not connected
S not connected
T Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect)
U Recloser Status Common(24Vdc)
V Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Trip)
W Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close)
X not connected
Z not connected

Ÿ Control EVRC2A-N Receptacle : MS3102 28-21S(Female)


Ÿ Recloser Receptacle : MS3102 28-21P(Male)
Ÿ Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.5”)
Ÿ Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin “R”

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 219


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 13-16. Control Receptacle

“Figure 13-16. Control Receptacle” shows Female Receptacle installed in Control EVRC2A-N.

220 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.18. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling


Ÿ Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling.
Ÿ For Control Cable assembling, connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position.
Following notices are suggested.
n Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing.
n Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle; repeat this
to complete connection.
n Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling, do the opposite way of Control
Cable assembling

Figure 13-17. Recloser Receptacle Figure 13-18. Control Cable

13.19. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions


Table 13-3. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin Function

A AC Power Input
B AC Power Input (Neutral)
C not connected

Standard Input Voltage of Control EVRC2A-


N is 220Vac. Figure 13-19. Power Receptacle

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 221


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.20. AC Power Cable


TYPE : MS22-2S(Female)
Cable Length : 2C-3.5㎟ 6meter(236")
A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase)
B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral)
C PIN : not connected

13.21. Fuses
Table 13-4. Fuses
Rating /
Positions Dimensions Purpose
External AC - Power Input

7A/220Vac 0.25×1.25" Input Line of Transformer in UPS


Terminal Block TF1
15A/110Vac (6.385×31.75)㎜ Module AC Power

3A/220Vac 0.25"×1.25" Input Line of Transformer in


Terminal Block TF2
6A/110Vac (6.385×31.75)㎜ Control EVRC2A-N AC Power.

0.25"×1.25" AC Power outlet and Heater


Terminal Block TF3 10A
(6.385×31.75)㎜ User Available AC Power

Inside Relay Module F1 0.197"×0.787"


1A Trip Control
(Analog board) (5×20)㎜

Inside Relay Module F2 0.197"×0.787"


1A Close Control
(Analog board) (5×20)㎜

Inside Relay Module F3 0.197"×0.787"


2A Relay Module Power
(Analog board) (5×20)㎜

Inside Relay Module F4 0.197"×0.787"


5A User-Available DC Power
(Analog board) (5×20)㎜

222 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.22. Battery and Control run time


Table 13-5. Battery Specs
Maker Global & Yuasa Battery Co., Ltd.(Made in Korea)
Battery Type ES18-12
Nominal Voltage 12V
Nominal capacity 18 amp-hours
Dimension 181×76×167㎜(7.126×3×6.575")
Self-discharge Versus Time 12 month at +20℃(+68℉), 5 month at +40℃(+104℉)
Service life Time 3∼5 years at +20℃(+68℉), 1 years at +50℃(+122℉)
Battery Connector(CN11) Molex Connector 3191-2R
Controller run time 30 hours at +20℃(+68℉), 15 hours at -25℃(-13℉)
Recharge Time 60 hours at +20℃(+68℉)

Ÿ Sealed lead - acid Battery Type, use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in series.


Ÿ Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is connected to
battery switch NFB1. In order to store Battery for a long time,
turn NFB1 “OFF” without disconnecting Harness connector.

Ÿ The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3% per


month when batteries are stored at an ambient temperature of

+20℃(+68℉). The self-discharge rate varies with ambient


temperature.

Ÿ The approximate depth of discharge or remaining capacity of an

battery can be empirically determined from “Figure 13-21.


Open Circuit Voltage” Figure 13-20. Battery
Ÿ Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits. Remove
Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure the battery

voltage.
If the battery voltage is less than 22.5Vdc, the residual capacity is

0%. The voltage can be recharged but requires maintenance.

Ÿ 24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and UPS Module through


NFB1(Battery Switch).

Relay Module supplies through CN4 Connector in Side Panel and

UPS Module supplies through P2 Connector of UPS Module.

Figure 13-21. Open Circuit Voltage

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 223


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.23. Charge Circuit


Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to
prevent over-recharge.
Charge inspection use 24Vac the same power as Relay Module has.
Disconnecting CN11 may cause spark, turn off NFB1(Battery Switch) and NFB2(Ac Power
switch) before disconnect CN11. Limit Current measuring should be tested on 10W in series with
CD Ammeter.

Charge Voltage : 27.5Vdc(±0.5V)


Charge Current : 300mAdc(±50mAdc)

13.24. Battery Change


Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and
is connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver.
For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and
black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of worker’s mistake.
For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire
later. Reference “Figure 13-20. Battery”

224 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.25. Communications
1) RS232 Pin Functions for Port1 and Port2
Table 13-6. RS232 Pin Functions for Port1 and Port2
Pin Serial Port1 Serial Port2 Definition
1 N/C DCD Data Carrier Detect
2 RXD RXD Receive Data
3 TXD TXD Transmit Data
4 N/C DTR Data Terminal Ready
5 GND GND Ground
6 N/C DSR Data Set Ready
7 N/C RTS Request To Send
8 N/C CTS Clear To Send
9 N/C N/C No Connection
Positions User Interface Panel(Male) Side Panel (Male)
Cable CC201 CC201,202,203

Purposes Maintenance DNP


Figure 11-22. RS232 Port

2) RS485/422 Pin Functions for Port3


Table 13-7. RS485/422 Pin Functions for Port3
Pin Serial Port3
1 RS485+
2 RS485-
3 TR1(120Ω)
4 RS422TX+
5 RS422TX-
6 TR2(120Ω)
7 SHIELD
8 N/C
9 IRIG-B(+)
10 IRIG-B(-)
Positions Side Panel (Male)
Figure 13-23. RS485/422 Port
Purposes Modbus

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 225


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) RJ-45 Pin Functions for Port4


Table 13-8. RJ-45Pin Functions for Port4
Pin Port4 Pin Port4
1 TX+ 6 N/C
2 TX- 7 N/C
3 RX+ 8 N/C
4 RX- Purpose IEC60870-5-104
5 N/C Figure 13-24. RJ-45 Port

13.26. Communication Cables


1) Cable CC201: Connect to Computer

Figure 13-24. Cable CC201 (connect to computer)

2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option

Figure 13-25. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.)

3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option

Figure 13-26. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)

226 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.27. Hardware Block Diagram

Figure 13-27. Hardware Block Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 227


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits

Figure 13-28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits

CC Close Coil TC Trip Coil


MC Magnetic Contactor C Capacitor
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor F Fuse
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply

Ÿ Recloser Trip and Close Power is charged from C1, C2, C3 in UPS module.
Ÿ C1 is used for Trip power, C2, C3 are used for Close power.
Ÿ Trip(Close) runs when IGBT is “ON”. MC runs and the charged Capacitor transfer the Power
to TC(CC), eventually Recloser runs.
Ÿ F1, F2 are Fuses to protect IGBT from MC damage. These are on Analog Board.

228 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.29. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close

Figure 13-29. UPS Module Block Diagram

Ÿ UPS Module charges Capacitor for Trip/Close. Its rated output voltage is 120Vdc.
Ÿ Trip and Close Capacitor are individually located and do not affect to each other during Trip
and Close.
Ÿ UPS Module runs by 120Vac Power or by Backup Battery.
Ÿ Transformer in EVRC2A-N connected with External AC Power generates 120Vac.
Ÿ Sealed lead-acid Type is used for Battery. Battery voltage does not run under 20Vac, runs
over 20Vdc.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 229


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.30. Main Board

Figure 13-30. MAIN BOARD

Indicates Firmware Upgrade Port, RTC(Real Time Clock), and main parts location. Also
indicates backup battery type.

230 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.31. Analog Board

Figure 13-31. ANALOG BOARD

Ÿ JP1, JP2, JP3 are Jumper Connecter, defining User Available DC Power Output Rating.
Ÿ F1, F2 are use to protect IGBT for Close and Trip.
Ÿ F3 is for Relay Module protection.
Ÿ JP1, JP2, JP3 are Jumper Connectors and define User Available DC Power rating.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 231


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram

Figure 13-32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram

Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram


Ÿ CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
Ÿ The capacity of CVD is 20㎊, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.

232 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram

Figure 13-33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram

Recloser EPR standard wiring diagram


Ÿ CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
Ÿ The capacity of CVD is 26㎊, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.
Ÿ Load side CVD-Option.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 233


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.34. Recloser Current Transformer (CT)


Table 13-9. Current Transformer (CT)
Description Pin Function
A C.T Phase C
CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard) B C.T Phase B
CT Resistance < 5W C C.T Phase A
D C.T Common(G)

13.35. Recloser Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD)


Table 13-10. Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD)
Description Pin Function
E CVD Source Phase C
EVR RECLOSER F CVD Source Phase B
1) Pin R is connected to Ground. G CVD Source Phase A
2) CVD Capacitance : 20㎊ H CVD Load side Phase T
3) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between J CVD Load side Phase S
Phase and Ground. K CVD Load side Phase R
R Cable shield and Ground
EPR RECLOSER E CVD Source Phase C
1) Pin R is connected to Ground. F CVD Source Phase B
2) CVD Capacitance of Source Phase : 26㎊ G CVD Source Phase A
3) CVD Capacitance of Load side Phase : 20㎊ K CVD Load side Phase R
(Option) R Cable shield and Ground
4) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between
Phase and Ground.
Ÿ For voltage measuring, use High Impedance AC
Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin.
Ÿ Voltage Measuring Method 1
measure MOV voltage.
(measure a voltage between MOV arms)
Ÿ Voltage Measuring Method 2
Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. and Figure 13-34. CVD Wiring Diagram
measure MOV voltage.

234 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.36. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type)


13.36.1. TYPE1 Sensor
It is used of Recloser manufactured before JUNE, 2005.

Table 13-11. EVR Pressure Sensor


Description Pin Function
L Pressure Sensor Output
1) Sensor Power is delivered from N Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Pin P(+12Vdc±0.5 %) and N(-) P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)
3) SF6 Gas is the insulating material and is affected by depending on pressure (density).
4) “Figure 11-35” shows pressure changes depending on temperature and Sensor Output voltage
depending on pressure.
5) EVR has 0.5bar at 20 ℃

Figure 13-35. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 235


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.36.2. TYPE2 Sensor


It is used for Recloser manufactured after JULY, 2005.

Table 13-12. EVR Pressure Sensor


Description Pin Function
L Pressure Sensor Output
1) Sensor Power is delivered from N Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-) P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)

5.0

4.5

4.0

3.5
Output voltage(Vdc)

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0.0
-0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Pressure (bar)

Figure 13-36. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage

236 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.37. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact


Table 13-13. 52 contact and 69 contact
Description Pin Function
T 69b(Monitored locked)
U Common(52 and 69)
V 52b(Monitored Trip)
69 is b Contact when unlocked. W 52a(Monitored Close)
a 52 common(Auxiliary)
b 52b(Auxiliary)
c 52a(Auxiliary)

13.38. Recloser Trip and Close Coil


Table 13-14. Trip and Close Coil
Description Pin Function
d Close and Trip Coil Common
1) Pin d, e and f are combined as one line. e Close and Trip Coil Common
2) Pin g, h and j are combined and placed as one f Close and Trip Coil Common
line g Close Coil
3) Pin m, p and r are combined and placed as one h Close Coil
line. j Close Coil
4) Close Coil Resistance : < 5W m Trip Coil
5) Trip Coil Resistance : < 2W p Trip Coil
r Trip Coil

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 237


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.39. Recloser Test Kit


1) RTS 2001 Model tests EVRC2A-N by Fault Simulation.
2) RTS 2001 can display Full Sequence of Trip time, Trip current, Interval on LCD screen and
also can variously test Calibration Mode, OCR Mode, External Mode, Manual Mode.

Figure 13-37. User Interface Panel Figure 13-38. Recloser Test Kit

Standard Ratings and Features


Table 13-15. Standard Ratings and Features
CLASSIFICATION RATINGS AND FEATURES

Power AC220V/2A 50/60HZ

Weigh Body (11㎏), Aluminum case (6㎏), Cable (2㎏), Total weight (19㎏)

Aluminum case : 500×500×240 (19.68"×19.68×9.45")


Dimensions
Body : 450×300×200 (17.72"×11.82×7.88")

Output Current Maximum_10Arms / 25VA(10A/0.25Ω)

Output Voltage Maximum_20Vpkpk / 200㎃ Continuous / 1A 10second

Recloser Control Interface Cable 6M(23.6")

Ammeter/Voltage ±1% (±3 digit)

Time difference ±1/2 cycle

Scope Terminal Max. current(10A), 10V (±3%, 10% at <50㎃)

System : -25∼+70℃(-13℉∼+158℉)
Operating Temperature
LCD : 0∼+70℃(+32℉∼+158℉)

238 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

14. MAINTANANCE
14.1. Warning Events
In control panel warning led if is lighted up bellow table refer and inspects.

Table 14-1. Waring Events(1/2)


EVENT LCD TEXT EXPLANATION RECOMMENDED ACTION

1. Check AC Power NFB


2. Check AC Power fuse
AC FAIL External power FAIL
3. Check AC supply, ensure AC -
connector is securely connected
1. Check AC supply
Battery charge circuit 2. Check Battery charge Voltage
CHGBD FAIL
FAIL (range DC 27 ~ DC 28V)
3. Replace Analog Module
Battery Discharge or 1. BATT DISCHG display
BATT FAIL
No Battery 2. NO BATTERY display

1. Check AC Power NFB


2. Check AC Power fuse
Battery Discharge
1) BATTDISCHG 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC connector is
(Value < 21V)
securely connected
SYSTEM POWER 4. Replace Battery charge T.R
NO Battery 1. Check battery NFB
2) NO BATTERY
(Value < 15V) 2. Check battery connection

1. +12V FAIL display


SYSPOW FAIL System power FAIL 2. +5 V FAIL display
3. -12V FAIL display
1. Check System power connection
System power
1) +12V FAIL 2. Check System power cable fault
+12V FAIL
3. Replace UPS Module
1. Check System power connection
System power +5V
2) +5 V FAIL 2. Check System power cable fault
FAIL
3. Replace UPS Module
1. Check System power connection
System power
3) -12V FAIL 2. Check System power cable fault
-12V FAIL
3. Replace UPS Module
1. No problem
SLEEP MODE SLEEP MODE Panel sleep mode
2. Refer to “Panel sleep time”

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 239


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 14-1. Waring Events(2/2)


EVENT LCD TEXT EXPLANATION RECOMMENDED ACTION

1. No problem
SLEEP MODE SLEEP MODE Panel sleep mode
2. Refer to “Panel sleep time”
POWER DOWN
POWER DOWN Power down mode No problem
MODE
1.Ensure Control cable is securely connected
Gas pressure Low 2. Check Control cable fault
GAS STATUS GAS LOW
(Value < 0.1 Bar) 3. Replace Main Processing Module
4. Replace Recloser.
1.Ensure Control cable is securely connected
Gas pressure High 2. Check Control cable fault
SETTING GAS HIGH
(Value > 1.5 Bar) 3. Replace Relay Module
4. Replace Recloser
A/D converter
REF1V FAIL Reference voltage 1 Replace A/D Converter Module
FAIL
SYSTEM RESTART
A/D converter
REF2V FAIL Reference voltage 2 Replace A/D Converter Module
FAIL
SET CHANGE Setting Changed No problem
RESTART System restarted No problem
Parallel EEPROM
MEMORY P-ROM FAIL Replace Main Processing Module
FAIL
Serial EEPROM
COMMUNICATION S-ROM FAIL Replace Main Processing Module
FAIL
D-RAM FAIL Data RAM FAIL Replace Main Processing Module
S-RAM FAIL Setting RAM FAIL Replace Main Processing Module
R-RAM FAIL RTC NV RAM FAIL Replace Main Processing Module
RTC FAIL RTC Time FAIL Replace Main Processing Module
RTC BAT LO RTC Battery LOW Replace RTC Battery
1. Execute All Clear Event
I-VAL FAIL Initial Value FAIL 2. Execute System Restart
3. Replace Main Processing Module
Initial Setting Value 1. Execute System Restart
I-SET FAIL
FAIL 2. Replace Main Processing Module
Communication
C-BD FAIL Option Replace Communication Module
Board FAIL
COLD RST Cold Restarted No problem

240 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY


RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.2. Malfunction Events


The following table of events describes the malfunction events available from the control and
what they indicate. It also suggest steps to follow to assist in determining why the event was
generated.

Table 14-2. Malfunction Events


EVENT DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION

1 Connection state of control cable


2. control Box inside CN8 connection state check
- Table 13-2 - Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-9
Control Cable - Figure 13-10 - Figure 13-16 Reference

3. control Box inside CN6 connection state check


- Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-9
OPERATION FAIL Operation Fail
- Figure 13-10 Reference

1.That control switch point of contact check


2. control Box inside FUSE state check

Etc.. - Figure 13-31 Reference


3. Replace Relay Module
4. Replace Recloser

1 Connection state of control cable


2. control Box inside CN1 connection state check
Current measure
- Table 13-2 - Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-9
Fail of current & - Figure 13-10 - Figure 13-16 Reference
Control Cable
voltage measurement 1 Connection state of control cable

Voltage 2. control Box inside CN2 connection state check


meaasure - Table 13-2 - Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-9

- Figure 13-10 - Figure 13-16 Reference

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 241

You might also like